2018 Jeep Renegade User Guide

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. User Guide Second Edition RENEGADE 18BU-926-AA DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 1 7/25/18 2:22 PM The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, Get warranty and other information online – you can resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly Driving and Alcohol review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties device or feature that may take their attention off the road. collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are (U.S.) or (Canada). www.mopar.com www.owners.mopar.ca computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. This guide has been prepared to help you get year, make and model of your vehicle. WARNING! If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular source for common questions. However, it is not a perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s substitute for your Owner’s Manual. your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive. For complete operational instructions, maintenance Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road procedures and important safety messages, please WARNING: consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, manuals found on the website on the back cover phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, Not all features shown in this guide may apply do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area to your vehicle. For additional information on and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 2 7/25/18 2:22 PM Congratulations on selecting your new FCA ments to its products without imposing any This User Guide is not a replacement for the full LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents obligation upon itself to install them on prod- Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every precision workmanship, distinctive styling, ucts previously manufactured. operation and procedure possible with your ve- and high quality. hicle. This User Guide has been prepared to help ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the you quickly become acquainted with the im- For more detailed descriptions of the topics road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on portant features of your vehicle. It contains discussed in this User Guide, as well as the steering wheel. You have full responsibil- most things you will need to operate and information covering features and processes ity and assume all risks related to the use of maintain the vehicle, including emergency not covered in this User Guide, the full ve- the features and applications in this vehicle. information. hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for free online in a printer-friendly PDF format. Only use the features and applications when When it comes to service, remember that your it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle in an accident involving serious injury or supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro- best, has factory-trained technicians and death. priate web address below: genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your This guide illustrates and describes the op- satisfaction. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html eration of features and equipment that are (U.S. Residents) either standard or optional on this vehicle. HOW TO FIND YOUR www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) This guide may also include a description of OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE features and equipment that are no longer FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By con- available or were not ordered on this vehicle. This publication has been prepared as a ref- verting from paper to electronic delivery for Please disregard any features and equipment erence item to help you quickly become ac- the majority of the user information for your described in this guide that are not available quainted with the most important features vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de- on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the and processes of your vehicle. It contains mand for tree-based products and lessen the most things you will need to operate and right to make changes in design and specifi- stress on our environment. cations and/or make additions to or improve- maintain the vehicle, including emergency information and procedures.

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu- cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can Essential Information page. A few pages further there is a key for cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper- getting to know the chapter order and the ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli- Each time direction instructions (left/right or relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are a textual indication of the current chapter at fatal injury. Drive carefully. given, these must be intended as regarding the side of each even page. an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be Symbols properly specified in the text. Some vehicle components have colored la- The figures in this User Guide are provided by bels whose symbols indicate precautions to way of example only: this might imply that be observed when using this component. some details of the image do not correspond Rollover Warning Label to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Failure to use the driver and passenger seat In addition, the User Guide has been con- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher belts provided is a major cause of severe or ceived considering vehicles with the steering rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a notes that the universal use of existing seat that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the higher center of gravity than many passenger belts could cut the highway death toll by right side, the position or construction of vehicles. It is capable of performing better in 10,000 or more each year and could reduce some controls is not exactly mirror-like with a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven disabling injuries by two million annually. In respect to the figure. in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- of control. Because of the higher center of To identify the chapter with the information cantly more likely to die than a person wear- gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may needed you can consult the index at the end ing a seat belt. Always buckle up. of this User Guide. roll over while some other vehicles may not.

2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE CHANGES/ MANUAL THIS USE TO HOW While reading this User Guide you will find a ALTERATIONS series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre- IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the vent incorrect use of components which vehicle might seriously affect its safety and could cause accidents or injuries. road holding, thus causing accidents, in There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol- which the occupants could even be fatally lowed to prevent against procedures that injured. could result in damage to your vehicle.

3 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX 6 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 8 INTERIOR...... 9

7 INSTRUMENT PANEL GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Instrument Panel 1 — Air Vents 4 — Hand Grip 7 — Multifunction Lever 2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Glove Compartment 8 — Headlight Switch 3 — Uconnect Radio 6 — Steering Wheel

8 INTERIOR

Interior Features 1 — Power Window Switches 4 — Climate Controls 7 — Seats 2 — Uconnect Radio 5 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/Manual Options) 3 — Switch Panel 6 — Selec-Terrain Mode Knob — If Equipped

9 10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS...... 13 Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 . .25 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...... 30 Key Fob With Remote Control ...... 13 HEADRESTRAINTS...... 25 Turn Signals ...... 31 IGNITIONSWITCH...... 14 Front Head Restraints ...... 25 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 31 Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Rear Head Restraints...... 26 Front Wiper Operation ...... 31 Entry...... 14 STEERING WHEEL...... 26 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . .32 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...... 26 Rear Wiper Operation...... 33 EQUIPPED ...... 15 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . .27 CLIMATECONTROLS...... 34 General Information ...... 16 MIRRORS ...... 27 Automatic Climate Control Overview....34 SENTRYKEY...... 16 Folding Mirror ...... 27 Climate Control Functions...... 41 General Information ...... 16 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 28 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF Equipped ...... 42 EQUIPPED ...... 17 EXTERIORLIGHTS...... 28 Operating Tips ...... 42 Headlights ...... 28 To Arm The System ...... 17 WINDOWS...... 43 To Disarm The System ...... 17 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped ...... 28 Power Window Controls ...... 43 DOORS ...... 18 High Beams ...... 29 Auto-Down Feature ...... 44 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If Flash-To-Pass ...... 29 Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Equipped ...... 18 Protection — If Equipped ...... 44 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . .29 Child Locks...... 21 Reset Auto-Up ...... 45 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — SEATS...... 22 If Equipped ...... 29 Wind Buffeting ...... 45 Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 22 Parking Lights ...... 30 POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF.....45 Split Rear Seats ...... 23 Headlight Delay ...... 30 Power My Sky Operation ...... 45 11 Emergency Open/Close...... 46 Power Sun Shade ...... 48 LIFTGATE ...... 50 Wind Buffeting ...... 47 Auto Reverse Feature...... 48 Opening...... 50 POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH Sunroof Maintenance...... 49 Closing ...... 51 POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED .47 HOOD...... 49 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 51 Opening...... 48 To Open The Hood ...... 49 Power Outlet ...... 51 Closing ...... 48 To Close The Hood ...... 49 Power Inverter — If Equipped ...... 52 Wind Buffeting ...... 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

12 KEYS Key Fobs To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. Push and release the unlock button on the The ignition system consists of a key fob with key fob once to unlock the driver's door or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/ twice within five seconds to unlock all doors STOP push button ignition system. The Re- and the liftgate. mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key All doors can be programmed to unlock on the fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if first push of the unlock button. Refer to equipped. “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the NOTE: Owner’s Manual for further information. The key fob may not be found if it is located NOTE: next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec- If the vehicle is unlocked by key fob, and no tronic device; these devices may block the door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle key fob’s wireless signal. will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm will arm. To change the current setting, Key Fob With Remote Control refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" The key fob with Remote Control contains a Keyless Ignition Key Fob in the Owner’s Manual for further informa- Remote Keyless Entry feature. The Remote 1 — Unlock tion. Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or 2 — Lock To Lock The Doors And Liftgate unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the 3 — Remote Start Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi- 4 — Panic Push and release the lock button on the key mately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key 5 — Emergency Key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

13 Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Duplication of key fobs may be performed at NOTE: Passive Entry an authorized dealer. This procedure consists Changes or modifications not expressly ap- of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle proved by the party responsible for compli- If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate electronics. A blank key fob is one that has ance could void the user’s authority to oper- is open, the doors will lock. The doors will never been programmed. ate the equipment. unlock again automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other- NOTE: wise the doors will stay locked. IGNITION SWITCH • When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Request For Additional Key Fobs System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — you to an authorized dealer. Passive Entry NOTE: • Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut Only key fobs that are programmed to the This feature allows the driver to operate the to match the vehicle locks. vehicle electronics can be used to start and ignition switch with the push of a button as operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro- General Information long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- The following regulatory statement applies to grammed to any other vehicle. all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in The push button ignition has three operating this vehicle: positions. The three positions are OFF, ON, WARNING! and RUN.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC • Always remove the key fobs from the Rules and with Industry Canada license- NOTE: vehicle and lock all doors when leaving exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- If the ignition switch does not change with the vehicle unattended. ject to the following two conditions: the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back • Always remember to place the ignition in 1. This device may not cause harmful the OFF mode. up method can be used to operate the igni- interference. tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite 2. This device must accept any interference of the emergency key) of the key fob against received, including interference that may the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to cause undesired operation. operate the ignition switch. 14 NOTE: WARNING! For further information, refer to "Starting The • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, Engine," in "Starting And Operating" in the or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Owner’s Manual. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of REMOTE STARTING reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Push the remote start button on the key fob • Do not leave the key fob in or near the twice within five seconds. Pushing the re- vehicle, or in a location accessible to mote start button a third time shuts the children, and do not leave the ignition in engine off. the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP START/STOP Ignition Button or move the vehicle. button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode. NOTE: • Do not leave children or animals inside The vehicle will not start if the key fob is parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior NOTE: located inside the cargo area and the liftgate heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • With remote start, the engine will only run is opened. for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. WARNING! CAUTION! • The vehicle must be started with the key • When leaving the vehicle, always remove An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for after two consecutive timeouts. the key fob from the vehicle and lock thieves. Always remove key fob from the your vehicle. vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

15 General Information SENTRY KEY General Information The following regulatory statement applies to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: the engine. The system does not need to be this vehicle: armed or activated. Operation is automatic, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or Rules and with Industry Canada license- Rules and with Industry Canada license- unlocked. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ject to the following two conditions: CAUTION! 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and ference, and The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote 2. This device must accept any interference 2. This device must accept any interference starting systems. Use of these systems received, including interference that may received, including interference that may may result in vehicle starting problems cause undesired operation. cause undesired operation. and loss of security protection. NOTE: NOTE: All of the key fobs provided with your new Changes or modifications not expressly ap- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle proved by the party responsible for compli- GETTING TO KNOW YOURproved VEHICLE by the party responsible for compli- electronics. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ate the equipment.

16 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM 2. Perform one of the following methods to NOTE: — IF EQUIPPED lock the vehicle: • The driver's door key cylinder and the lift- • Push the lock button on the interior gate button on the key fob cannot arm or The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve- power door lock switch with the driver disarm the vehicle security alarm. hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless and/or passenger door open. • The vehicle security alarm remains armed Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op- during liftgate entry. If someone enters the eration. While the vehicle security alarm is • Push the lock button on the exterior vehicle through the liftgate and opens any armed, interior switches for door locks and Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid door, the alarm will sound. liftgate release are disabled. If something key fob available in the same exterior triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm zone (refer to "Doors" in "Getting To • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will will provide the following audible and visible Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s not unlock the doors. signals: Manual for further information). • The horn will pulse. The vehicle security alarm is designed to • Push the lock button on the key fob. protect your vehicle. However, you can create • The turn signals will flash. 3. If any doors are open, close them. conditions where the system will give you a • The vehicle security light in the instrument false alarm. If one of the previously described cluster will flash. ToDisarm The System arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm, regardless of whether ToArm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in using any of the following methods: Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will alarm: • Push the unlock button on the key fob. sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed • Grasp the passive entry door handle to in the “OFF” mode. unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s Manual for further information. • Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the system. 17 If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry security alarm will remain armed when the door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will affected, resulting in a slower response flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, time. disarm the vehicle security alarm. • If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle, and no door is opened DOORS within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm will Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If arm. Equipped • The key fob may not be able to be detected The Passive Entry system is an enhancement by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system located next to a mobile phone, laptop or and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This other electronic device; these devices may Grab The Door Handle To Unlock feature allows you to lock and unlock the block the key fob’s wireless signal and vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the prevent the keyless-go system from starting NOTE: key fob lock or unlock buttons. the vehicle. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE grammed, all doors will unlock when you grab NOTE: To Unlock From The Driver's Side hold of the front driver’s door handle. To • Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further in- front driver door handle to unlock the driver's refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- formation. door automatically. dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

18 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un- lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key Push The Door Handle Button To Lock DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door NOTE: handle lock button to lock all four doors. The Passive Entry system will not operate if Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the key fob battery is dead. the door handle lock button. This could un- The vehicle doors can also be locked by using lock the door(s). the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

19 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry NOTE: NOTE: Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a • The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside To minimize the possibility of unintentionally lock the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your unlock feature is built into the Electronic fob is detected outside the vehicle. The ve- vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped Liftgate release. hicle will not unlock the doors when any of with an automatic door unlock feature. the following conditions are met: • If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro- FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with grammed in the instrument cluster display, • The doors are manually locked using the Passive Entry. There are three situations that if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock door lock knobs. trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive when you push the Electronic Release. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is pro- Entry vehicle: • There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of grammed in Uconnect, the liftgate will un- 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive either Passive Entry door handle. lock when you push the electronic unlock/ Entry key fob while a door is open. lock button on the liftgate. For further To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate 2. A lock request is made by the Passive information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” Entry door handle while a door is open. The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for built into the electronic liftgate release. With further information. 3. A lock request is made by the door panel a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft switch while the door is open. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic When any of these situations occur, after all Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo- open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search tion. will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry To Lock The Liftgate key fob inside the car, and it does not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft the car will unlock and alert the customer. (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release. 20 To release the emergency key, proceed as follows: WARNING! power windows, other controls, or move 1. Slide the emergency key release button to the vehicle. the side. • Do not leave children or animals inside 2. Remove the emergency key from the key parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior fob with Remote Control housing. heat buildup may cause them to be severely injured or killed NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the Child Locks door lock cylinder from either direction. To provide a safer environment for small chil- WARNING! dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, Lock system. Liftgate Release/Passive Entry or with access to an unlocked vehicle. To use the system, open each rear door, use a 1 — Liftgate Handle Allowing children to be in a vehicle flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and 2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. severely injured or killed. Children When the system on a door is engaged, that Emergency Unlocking Driver Door should be warned not to touch the door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in If the key fob battery is low or dead, the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear the unlocked position. emergency key can be used to unlock the selector. Do not leave the key fob in or driver side door lock cylinder. near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate

21 • After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the WARNING! inside to make certain it is in the desired sion, people riding in these areas are position. more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • For emergency exit with the system en- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of gaged, rotate the lock/unlock dial to the your vehicle that is not equipped with unlocked position, roll down the window, seats and seat belts. In a collision, and open the door with the outside door people riding in these areas are more handle. likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a WARNING! seat and using a seat belt properly. Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a Heated Seats — If Equipped collision. Remember that the rear doors Child-Protection Door Lock Function can only be opened from the outside when The heated seat buttons are located in your the Child-Protection locks are engaged vehicle’s touchscreen. NOTE: (locked). • When the child lock system is engaged, the You can choose between two heating levels: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE door can only be opened by using the out- SEATS • Press the heated seat button once to side door handle even though the inside turn the HI setting on. door lock is in the unlocked position. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. • Press the heated seat button a second • After disengaging the Child-Protection time to turn the LO setting on. Door Lock system, always test the door from • Press the heated seat button a third the inside to make certain it is in the WARNING! time to turn the heating elements off. desired position. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

22 If the HI-level setting is selected, the system NOTE: WARNING! will automatically switch to LO-level after • Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- approximately 145 minutes of continuous be necessary to position the front seat to its tion or other physical condition must operation. At that time, the display will mid-track position. Be sure that the front exercise care when using the seat change from HI to LO, indicating the change. seats are fully upright and positioned for- heater. It may cause burns even at low The LO-level setting will turn off automati- ward, this will allow the rear seat to fold cally after approximately 60 minutes. temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. down easily. NOTE: • Do not place anything on the seat or • Prior to folding the rear seat, you must The engine must be running for the heated seatback that insulates against heat, secure the rear armrest in the upright posi- seats to operate. such as a blanket or cushion. This may tion. cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit- Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped • You may experience deformation in the seat ting in a seat that has been overheated cushion from the seat belt buckles if the In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, could cause serious burns due to the seats are left folded for an extended period when turning on the vehicle the driver’s increased surface temperature of the of time. This is normal and by simply open- heated seat will automatically turn on when seat. temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). ing the seats to the open position, over time Split Rear Seats the seat cushion will return to its normal Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or shape. disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for which increases the storage of the rear cargo WARNING! further information. area. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a WARNING! cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these • Persons who are unable to feel pain to areas are more likely to be seriously the skin because of advanced age, injured or killed. chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-

23 4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the WARNING! left or right rear seatback completely • Do not allow people to ride in any area of forward. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Cargo Area Enlargement Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional storage in the rear cargo area. Proceed as follows: 1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints. Rear Seat 2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat. Proceed as follows: 3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer Release Lever GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE both sides of the rear seatbacks com- to “Removable Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area pletely forward. Features” in your Owner’s Manual for fur- Seatback Repositioning ther information. Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area NOTE: 2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints. If interference from the cargo area prevents Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area the seatback from fully locking, you will have 3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side allows you to carry a single passenger on the difficulty returning the seat to its proper of the seat and rest them on the seat belt right side of the rear seat, while the enlarge- position. ment of the right side allows you to carry two guide. passengers. 24 1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt HEAD RESTRAINTS To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the guides on the top edge of the seat to head restraint. To lower the head restraint, ensure the seatbacks properly latch. Head restraints are designed to reduce the push the adjustment button, located at the risk of injury by restricting head movement in 2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back base of the head restraint, and push down- the event of a rear impact. Head restraints until they lock on both the latches. Verify ward on the head restraint. the red notches are no longer visible on should be adjusted so that the top of the head the release lever. If the red notches are restraint is located above the top of your ear. visible, the seatback is not secure. WARNING! Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 • All occupants, including the driver, Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the should not operate a vehicle or sit in a rear armrest tab to release it from the seat vehicle’s seat until the head restraints and pull forward. are placed in their proper positions in The center part of the rear seat can also be order to minimize the risk of neck injury used as rear armrest with cupholders. in the event of a crash. • Head restraints should never be ad- WARNING! justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints Be certain that the seatback is securely improperly adjusted or removed could Head Restraint Adjustment Button locked into position. If the seatback is not cause serious injury or death in the event securely locked into position the seat will of a collision. NOTE: not provide the proper stability for child The head restraints should only be removed seats and/or passengers. An improperly Front Head Restraints by qualified technicians, for service purposes latched seat could cause serious injury. Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and only. If either of the head restraints require passenger head restraints. removal, see an authorized dealer.

25 To raise the head restraint, pull upward on STEERING WHEEL WARNING! the head restraint. Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column • All occupants, including the driver, To lower the head restraint, push the adjust- should not operate a vehicle or sit in a ment button, located at the base of the head This feature allows you to tilt the steering vehicle’s seat until the head restraints restraint, and push downward on the head column upward or downward. It also allows are placed in their proper positions in restraint. you to lengthen or shorten the steering col- order to minimize the risk of neck injury umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located in the event of a crash. below the steering wheel at the end of the • Head restraints should never be ad- steering column. justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Rear Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard

GETTING TO KNOW YOURhead VEHICLE restraints and one center head restraint for its rear passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the center seat is being occupied, the head re- Adjustment Button Locations straint should be in the raised position. When NOTE: there are no occupants in the center seat, the The head restraints should only be removed head restraint can be lowered for maximum Tilt Steering Wheel Lever by qualified technicians, for service purposes visibility for the driver. only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer. 26 To unlock the steering column, push the one temperature setting. Once the heated tilt/telescoping lever downward (toward the steering wheel switch has been turned WARNING! floor). To tilt the steering column, move the on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in- steering wheel upward or downward as de- or more before automatically shutting off. jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering This time will vary based on environmental tion, or other physical conditions must column, pull the steering wheel outward or temperatures. The heated steering wheel can exercise care when using the steering push it inward as desired. shut off early or may not turn on when the wheel heater. It may cause burns even at steering wheel is already warm. The heated low temperatures, especially if used for To lock the steering column in position, pull steering wheel control button is located in long periods. the tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully your vehicle’s touchscreen. • Do not place anything on the steering engaged. wheel that insulates against heat, such Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped as a blanket or steering wheel covers of WARNING! In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, any type and material. This may cause when turning on the vehicle the heated steer- the steering wheel heater to overheat. Do not adjust the steering column while ing wheel will automatically turn on when driving. Adjusting the steering column temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). while driving or driving with the steering MIRRORS column unlocked, could cause the driver Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or Folding Mirror to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in follow this warning may result in serious “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the injury or death. further information. mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped WARNING! positions: full forward, normal and full rear- The steering wheel contains a heating ele- • Persons who are unable to feel pain to ward. ment that helps warm your hands in cold the skin because of advanced age, weather. The heated steering wheel has only

27 Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE: The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to active for up to three minutes after the igni- fold or unfold the exterior mirrors. tion is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defroster. EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight Switch Headlights Turning on the headlights will illuminate the The headlight switch is located on the left instrument cluster and the controls located Power Mirror Switch GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE side of the instrument panel. The headlight on the instrument panel. switch controls the operation of the head- 1 — Power Folding Mirror Switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If 2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch lights, side marker lights, daytime running 3 — Mirror Selector Switch lights, fog lights and the dimming of the Equipped instrument cluster and interior lighting. The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the engine is started and remain on To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the unless the headlights are turned on or the ignition must be in the RUN position. engine is shut off.

28 The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal Flash-To-Pass Light Sensor operation and resume operation when the You can signal another vehicle with your The light sensor is equipped with an infrared turn signal operation has ended. headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc- LED, located on the windshield. It detects High Beams tion lever toward you. This will cause the changes in light intensity outside the vehicle, headlights to turn on at high beam and re- based on the sensitivity of light set by using To turn on the high beam headlights, push main on until the lever is released. the menu on the display or on the Uconnect the turn signal lever forward (toward the front system. of the vehicle) and an indicator will illumi- Automatic Headlights — If Equipped The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the nate in the cluster. To turn off the high This system automatically turns the head- amount of external light required for control- beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward lights on or off according to ambient light (toward the rear of the vehicle). levels. To turn the system on, rotate the ling the lighting. headlight switch clockwise to the last detent Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control (AUTO position) for automatic headlight op- — If Equipped eration. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds system provides increased forward lighting at after you place the ignition into the OFF night by automating high beam control position. To turn the automatic system off, through the use of a digital camera mounted move the headlight switch out of the AUTO on the inside rearview mirror. This camera position. detects vehicle specific light and automati- Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this section for cally switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. High Beam And Turn Signal Controls more information. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams The ignition must be in the RUN or START • The multifunction lever must be in the high to activate. position before the headlights will come on in beam position in order to activate the Au- the automatic mode. tomatic High Beams. 29 • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con- The time delay of the headlights is program- Front Fog Lights — If Equipped trol can be turned on or off using the mable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set- The front fog light switch is built into the tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Headlight Delay Activation headlight switch. Manual for further information. To activate the delay feature, place the igni- To activate the front fog lights, turn on the • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights tion in the OFF position while the headlights parking lights or the low beam headlights and and taillights of vehicles in the field of view are still on. Then, turn off the headlights push the fog light button on the headlight will cause headlights to remain on longer within two minutes. The delay interval begins switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and when the headlight switch is turned off from the fog light button on the headlight switch a other obstructions on the windshield or the “Low beam” position. second time or turn off the headlight switch. camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. If the headlight switch is in AUTO position An indicator light in the instrument cluster and headlights were on before the ignition is illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. When set to AUTO, the system automatically OFF, the delay interval begins automatically. turns the headlights on or off based on am- NOTE: bient light levels. Headlight Delay Deactivation The fog lights will operate with the low beam Parking Lights The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the headlights, the parking lights or by placing high beam headlights will turn off the fog From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight lights. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the ignition in the RUN position. switch to the first detent (parking position) to turn on the parking lights. The parking light If you shut off the lights before the ignition is Cornering Lights indicator in the instrument cluster will illu- turned on, they will turn off in the normal The cornering lights are a feature to improve minate. manner. visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light incorporated in the Headlight Delay NOTE: front fog light will illuminate on the side of The lights must be turned off within two This feature provides the safety of headlight the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF illumination for up to 90 seconds when leav- the turn signal indicator is on. It can be ing your vehicle in an unlit area. position to activate this feature. activated through the Uconnect System. 30 Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- Windshield Washer Operation dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- To use the washer, pull the lever toward you mation. and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is TurnSignals pulled while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several Move the multifunction lever up or down and wipe cycles after the lever is released, and the arrows on each side of the instrument then resume the intermittent interval previ- cluster flash to show proper operation of the ously selected. front and rear turn signal lights. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in NOTE: the off position, the wipers will operate for When the Daytime Running Lights are on and Windshield Wiper Stalk several wipe cycles, then turn off. a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Run- ning Lamp will turn off on the side of the CAUTION! WARNING! vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. Always remove any buildup of snow that pre- Sudden loss of visibility through the wind- The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on vents the windshield wiper blades from re- shield could lead to a collision. You might when the turn signal is turned off. turning to the “park” position. If the wind- not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To shield wiper switch is turned off, and the avoid sudden icing of the windshield during WIPERS AND WASHERS blades cannot return to the “park” position, freezing weather, warm the windshield with damage to the wiper motor may occur. the defroster before and during windshield The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo- washer use. cated on the lever on the right side of the Front Wiper Operation steering column. The front wipers are oper- Mist ated by rotating a switch, located on the end Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of Use this feature when weather conditions of the lever. the two detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low wiper operation make occasional usage of the wipers neces- and the fourth for high wiper operation. sary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. 31 NOTE: This function can be activated or deactivated • The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) The Mist feature does not activate the washer by the Uconnect Settings through the radio. and the rain sensor detects the presence of pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- rain. sprayed on the windshield. The wash func- dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- NOTE: tion must be used in order to spray the mation. On vehicles equipped with automatic trans- windshield with washer fluid. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted mission, the Rain Sensing Wipers will be- Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po- come inactive even if the lever is in one of the sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper intermittent positions if the vehicle is placed This feature senses moisture on the wind- delay position two is the most sensitive. in NEUTRAL and the vehicle speed is less shield and automatically activates the wipers Place the wiper switch in the off position than 3 mph (5 km/h). This prevents damage for the driver. The feature is especially useful when not using the system. to the windshield wipers during an automatic for road splash or overspray from the wind- car wash. shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition the end of the multifunction lever to one of When the user switches the ignition from OFF NOTE: the two detent positions for intermittent set- to RUN or START with the lever already in the • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate tings, to activate this feature. intermittent position, no wipe cycle is per- when the wiper switch is in the low or NOTE: formed for safety reasons. This temporary high-speed position. GETTING TO KNOW YOURIf VEHICLE the end of the multifunction lever rotates inhibition avoids accidental activations of the • The Rain Sensing feature may not function from off to the first intermittent setting or wiping (e.g during the hand washing of the properly when ice, or dried salt water is from the first intermittent setting to the sec- windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow present on the windshield. ond intermittent setting, the wipers will per- conditions). The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in three ways: • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or form a round up to clean the windshield. silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor- • Moving the level in off position and then in mance. Intermittent positions. • One MIST command actuation.

32 • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on To use the washer, push the lever forward and Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped and off using the Uconnect System, refer to hold while spray is desired. If the lever is In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in pushed while in the intermittent setting, the when turning on the vehicle the driver’s your Owner’s Manual for further wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe heated seat will automatically turn on when information. cycles after the end of the lever is released, temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). and then resume the intermittent interval Rear Wiper Operation previously selected. Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or The rear wiper/washer controls are located on disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the the lever on the right side of the steering “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for off position, the wiper will operate for several column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by further information. wipe cycles, then turn off. rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. NOTE: CAUTION! As a protective measure, the pump will stop if NOTE: Failure to follow these cautions can cause the switch is held for more than 30 seconds. If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is damage to the heating elements: Once the lever is released, the pump will shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will per- • Use care when washing the inside of the resume normal operation. form one round up to clean the rear window. rear window. Do not use abrasive window Rear Window Defroster cleaners on the interior surface of the Rotate the center portion of the lever upward window. Use a soft cloth and a mild to the first detent for intermittent operation The rear window defroster button is located washing solution, wiping parallel to the and to the second detent for continuous rear with the Climate Controls on the instrument heating elements. Labels can be peeled wiper operation. If the front wiper is set to panel. Push this button to turn on the rear off after soaking with warm water. Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as well as window defroster. An indicator in the button • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, “Enabled” through Uconnect settings), plac- will illuminate when the rear window de- or abrasive window cleaners on the inte- ing the rear wiper in an intermittent position froster is on. The rear window defroster auto- rior surface of the window. will cause the front and rear wipers to sync matically turns off after approximately • Keep all objects a safe distance from the up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster window. rear wipers to also stop. off, push the button a second time. 33 CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Climate Control Overview GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

34 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

35 Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

36 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description

MAX A/C Button MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.

A/C Button Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

Recirculation Button Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON. NOTE: • When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk. • When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If the Re- circulation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on. AUTO Button Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information. Front Defrost Button The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, FRONT the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.

37 Icon Description

Rear Defrost Button Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.

Faceplate Knob Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch- MODE screen. • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The Touchscreen Buttons blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Driver and Passenger Temperature Control Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings independently. Pushing the blue arrow indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates warmer temperatures. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

38 Icon Description Mode Button Mode Button Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

39 Icon Description

Climate Control OFF Button This button turns the Climate Control System off.

Climate Control System Compressor Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Func- Selecting the footwell/windshield or only tion) windshield distribution activates the Climate Push the A/C Control button to activate/ Control system compressor and the air recir- deactivate the compressor (activation is indi- Push the MAX-defrost button to activate culation is set to outside air intake. cated by the LED on the button turning on). (LED on) the windshield and side window demisting function. This logic guarantees optimum visibility at The system remembers that the compressor the windows. Max-defrost is also available in has been turned off, even after the engine The Climate Control system carries out the manual mode. has stopped. following operations: Rear Window Defrosting Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO • Turns on the air conditioning compressor MODE (AUTO LED will turn off). To restore when environmental conditions are suit- Push and release the rear window defrost automatic control of compressor, push the able. button to turn the function on/off. GETTING TO KNOW YOURAUTO VEHICLE button again. • Turns air recirculation off. Activation of this function is indicated by the NOTE: • Sets blower fan to the maximum speed. rear defrost indicator light on the instrument With the compressor off, air cannot be intro- • Directs air flow to windshield and front side panel turning on. If equipped, push the rear duced to the passenger compartment with a window diffusers. defrost button to activate the defrosting of temperature lower than the outside tempera- door mirrors and heated rear window. When the Recirculation Control or AUTO but- ture. Under certain environmental condi- tons are pushed, the Climate Control system tions, windows could fog rapidly since the air will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) is not dehumidified. function. 40 • Max Defrost and manually adjust the blower and airflow CAUTION! • Blower Increase mode settings. Also, make sure to select only To avoid causing damage to the rear win- Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. • AUTO dow defroster heating filaments do not NOTE: affix stickers or other objects to the inside To restart the Climate Control system in fully of the rear glass. automatic mode, push the AUTO button. • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and in- Turning Off The Climate Control System System Maintenance crease blower speed if needed. Push the ON/OFF button. In Winter, the Climate Control system must • If your air conditioning performance seems be turned on at least once a month for ap- lower than expected, check the front of the With the Climate Control system off: proximately ten minutes. A/C condenser (located in front of the ra- • Air recirculation is on, isolating the passen- diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in- Have the system inspected at an authorized ger compartment from the outside. sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from dealership before the summer. • The A/C compressor is off. the front of the radiator and through the NOTE: condenser. • The blower is off. This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant. MAX A/C • The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated. Climate Control Functions MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle NOTE: A/C (Air Conditioning) between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The The Climate Control unit stores the tempera- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the button illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. tures set before the system was turned off operator to manually activate or deactivate and restores them when one of the following the air conditioning system. When the air Pressing blower speed, temperature, recircu- knobs/buttons is pushed: conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu- lation, or mode settings, will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected set- • A/C midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press ting and MAX A/C to exit. • Recirculation the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning 41 Recirculation 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the Operating Tips system to maintain, by adjusting the In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode driver, and passenger temperatures. Once Summer Operation may lead to excessive window fogging. The the desired temperature is displayed, the Recirculation feature may be unavailable The engine cooling system must be protected system will achieve and automatically (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro- maintain that comfort level. conditions exist that could create fogging on vide proper corrosion protection and to pro- the inside of the windshield. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant level, it is not necessary to change the (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, settings. You will experience the greatest the Recirculation mode is not allowed in efficiency by simply allowing the system Winter Operation Defrost mode to improve window clearing to function automatically. operation. Recirculation is disabled auto- To ensure the best possible heater and defroster matically if this mode is selected. Attempting NOTE: performance, make sure the engine cooling sys- to use Recirculation while in this mode tem is functioning properly and the proper • It is not necessary to move the temperature amount, type, and concentration of coolant is causes the LED in the control button to blink settings. The system automatically adjusts and then turns off. used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during the temperature, mode, and fan speed to Winter months is not recommended, because it Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — provide comfort as quickly as possible. may cause window fogging. If Equipped To provide you with maximum comfort in the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vacation/Storage automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the Automatic Operation blower fan will remain on low until the engine Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of 1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC warms up. The fan will engage immediately if service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, panel. The system regulates the amount the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing run the air conditioning system at idle for of airflow. the front blower knob setting. about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 42 Window Fogging Outside Air Intake Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in Make sure the air intake, located directly in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the increase the front blower speed. Do not use air intake may reduce airflow, and if they the Recirculation mode without A/C for long enter the plenum, they could plug the water periods, as fogging may occur. drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. CAUTION! Cabin Air Filter Failure to follow these cautions can cause The climate control system filters out dust damage to the heating elements: and pollen from the air. Contact an autho- • Use care when washing the inside of rized dealer to service your cabin air filter, the rear window. Do not use abrasive and to have it replaced when needed. window cleaners on the interior surface Power Window Switches of the window. Use a soft cloth and a 1 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear mild washing solution, wiping parallel WINDOWS Doors) to the heating elements. Labels can be Power Window Controls 2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear peeled off after soaking with warm Window water. The power window switch is located on the 3 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- driver’s door panel. The driver’s power win- Window ments, or abrasive window cleaners on dow switch controls the operation of all the the interior surface of the window. windows. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

43 There are single window controls on each WARNING! Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse passenger door trim panel, which operate the Protection — If Equipped passenger door windows. The window con- power windows. Do not leave the key fob in trols will operate only when the ignition is in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces- The driver door power window switch and the the ON or RUN position. sible to children, and do not leave the front passenger door window switch have an ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Auto-Up feature. NOTE: Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended chil- Pull the window switch up, for about half a • If the Remote Start functionality is active, dren, can become entrapped by the win- second, and release and the window will go it is not possible to move any windows. dows while operating the power window up automatically. • The power window switches will remain switches. Such entrapment may result in To stop the window from going all the way up active for up to three minutes after the serious injury or death. during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push ignition is cycled to the OFF position. down on the switch briefly. Opening either front door will cancel this Auto-Down Feature feature. To close the window part way (manually), pull The driver door power window switch and the the window switch up briefly and release it. Push the Window Lockout switch to disable front and rear passenger doors window rear passenger window controls. When this switches have an Auto-Down feature. NOTE: feature is active, the LED light will illuminate Push the window switch down for half a • If the window runs into any obstacle during GETTING TO KNOW YOURand VEHICLE only the driver can operate the rear auto-closure, it will reverse direction and passenger windows. To undo this feature, second and release. The window will go down then go back down. Remove the obstacle push the switch again and the LED will turn automatically. and use the window switch again to close off. To stop the window from going all the way the window. down during the Auto-Down operation, pull WARNING! up or push down on the switch briefly.

Never leave children unattended in a ve- To open the window part way (manually), hicle, and do not let children play with push the window switch down briefly and release. 44 • Any impact due to rough road conditions 2. Push the window switch down firmly to POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF may trigger the auto-reverse function unex- open the window completely and continue pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap- to hold the switch down for an additional Power My Sky Operation pens, pull the switch lightly to the first two seconds after the window is fully Open/Close The Front Panel detent and hold to close the window open. manually. The power My Sky switches are located on the Wind Buffeting overhead console. The switches are used to WARNING! Wind buffeting can be described as the per- open and close the front panel. ception of pressure on the ears or a There is no auto-reverse protection when To automatically retract the front panel to the helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- the window is almost closed. To avoid open position, push the open/close button personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the and release. From the fully open position, hands, fingers and all objects from the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in pull the open/close switch and release. The window path before closing. certain open or partially open positions. This front panel will close completely. is a normal occurrence and can be mini- Reset Auto-Up mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear To stop the movement of the front panel windows open, open the front and rear win- during automatic closing or opening, briefly Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the dows together to minimize the buffeting. If push the open/close switch. window probably needs to be reset. To reset the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, Venting The Front Panel Auto-Up: adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the To vent the front panel push and release the 1. Pull the window switch up to close the buffeting or open any window. window completely and continue to hold vent switch. the switch up for an additional two sec- During the vent operation any push on the onds after the window is closed. open/close switch will stop the closing of the panel.

45 NOTE: Sunroof Reinitialization 9. As the front panel close switch is held, the sunroof panel will cycle to the fully open • If the My Sky is in open position, the vent The following procedure must be followed to position and then back to the fully closed switch must be held until the panel vents. reinitialize the sunroof and calibrate obstacle position again. • The power roof controls will operate only detection: 10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped, when the ignition is in the ON or RUN 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position. position. release the front panel close switch. 2. Push and hold the front panel close • If the Remote Start functionality is active, Sunroof reinitialization and obstacle switch until the sunroof panel is fully it will not be possible to move the roof. calibration is now complete. closed, then release the switch. Auto-Reverse Feature NOTE: 3. Open the driver side front door. If the switch is released prior to the sunroof The front panel of the retractable roof is 4. Turn the ignition OFF. completing the above procedure, the entire equipped with a auto-reverse safety system process must be repeated. that is able to detect the presence of an 5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back obstacle during the opening and closing mo- in the RUN position. Emergency Open/Close tion of the panel. 6. Push and hold the front panel close If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retract- When this event occurs, the front panel stops switch again. The reinitialization process able roof can be operated manually as fol- and reverses immediately. will begin within 10 seconds. Do not re- lows: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE lease the switch. NOTE: 1. Remove the protective cap located on the With both panels removed the retractable 7. The sunroof will stop and an audible inner lining. roof cannot be opened or closed. “click” will be heard. 2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that 8. Release the front panel close switch, then is supplied in the tool bag in the cargo push and hold it again within 5 seconds. area. Do not release the switch. 3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the key hole and turn it clockwise to open the roof or counter-clockwise to close. 46 CAUTION! POWER GLASS SUNROOF WARNING! WITH POWER SHADE — IF • When refitting panels, be careful to • Never leave children unattended in a avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of EQUIPPED vehicle, or with access to an unlocked clothing from getting caught under the The power sunroof switches are located be- vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or panels themselves. near the vehicle, or in a location acces- tween the sun visors on the overhead console. • Do not open the roof in the presence of sible to children. Do not leave the igni- snow or ice. There is risk of damage. tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occu- Wind Buffeting pants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power Wind buffeting can be described as the per- sunroof while operating the power sun- ception of pressure on the ears or a roof switch. Such entrapment may result helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- in serious injury or death. hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the • In a collision, there is a greater risk of windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in being thrown from a vehicle with an certain open or partially open positions. This open sunroof. You could also be seri- is a normal occurrence and can be mini- ously injured or killed. Always fasten mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear your seat belt properly and make sure all windows open, then open the front and rear passengers are also properly secured. windows together to minimize the buffeting. • Do not allow small children to operate If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, Power Sunroof Switches the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the 1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close other body parts, or any object, to proj- buffeting or open any window. 2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close ect through the sunroof opening. Injury 3 — Venting Sunroof may result.

47 Opening Wind Buffeting Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode Opening Sunroof Wind buffeting can be described as the per- Pull the shade switch for about one-half sec- ception of pressure on the ears or a ond and the shade will automatically close. To retract the sunroof to the open position, helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- During the automatic close operation, any push the Open/Close switch and the sunroof hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the movement of the shade switch will stop the will fully open. The sunroof can be stopped in shade. any position by pushing/pulling the switch a windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This second time while is opening. Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode is a normal occurrence and can be mini- Venting Sunroof mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear To close the shade part way (manually), pull To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch. windows open, then open the front and rear the shade switch briefly and release. windows together to minimize the buffeting. NOTE: If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, NOTE: The vent switch has the automatic function adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the • The sunroof and the shade controls will only at the opening of the sunroof. During the buffeting or open any window. operate only when the ignition is in the ON closing of the sunroof, the switch must be or RUN position. held until closed. Power Sun Shade • If the Remote Start functionality is active, Closing Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode it is not possible to move the sunroof. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing Sunroof Push the shade switch for about one-half Auto Reverse Feature second and the shade will automatically To close the sunroof completely, pull the open. During the automatic open operation, This feature will detect an obstruction in the Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully any movement of the shade switch will stop opening of the sunroof during the Automatic close. The sunroof can be stopped in any the shade. Close operation. If an obstruction in the path position by pushing/pulling the switch a sec- Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will ond time while it is closing. automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- To open the shade part way (manually), push tion if this occurs. the shade switch briefly and release. 48 WARNING! Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft • Do not let children play with the sunroof. cloth to clean the glass panel. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or HOOD near the vehicle, and do not leave the ToOpen The Hood ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key- less Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN Two latches must be released to open the mode. Occupants, particularly unat- hood. tended children, can become entrapped 1. Pull the hood release lever located under by the power sunroof while operating the the driver’s side of the instrument panel. power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and • In a collision, there is a greater risk of push the safety latch release lever toward Hood Release Lever being thrown from a vehicle with an the passenger side of the vehicle. The open sunroof. You could also be severely hood release lever is located behind the Remove the support rod from the locking tab injured or killed. Always fasten your seat center front edge of the hood. and insert it into the seat located on the belt properly and make sure all passen- underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is gers are properly secured. locked into position. • Do not allow small children to operate ToClose The Hood the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the through the sunroof opening. Injury may other hand, remove the support rod from its result. seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.

49 Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches LIFTGATE (30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop. Make sure that the hood is completely Opening closed. To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or WARNING! activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle. Be sure the hood is fully latched before To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with latched, it could open when the vehicle is one fluid motion. in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is injury or death. built into the Electronic Liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft CAUTION! (1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic Liftgate Release/Passive Entry Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo- To prevent possible damage, do not slam tion. 1 — Liftgate Handle the hood to close it. Lower hood to approxi- 2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location mately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive ve- Emergency Opening hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both Proceed as follows: latches engaged. 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). 2. Fold the rear seats forward.

50 3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located INTERNAL EQUIPMENT under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab. Power Outlet 4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets slot to trigger the release tab of the in this vehicle, one located under the HVAC liftgate. controls and one located in the drivers side Closing rear cargo area. These power outlets can power mobile phones, electronics and other Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate low power devices. lowering the liftgate. Release the handle • This power outlet is located in front of the when the liftgate reaches self closing posi- gear selector. tion. NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in Rear Cargo Power Outlet possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked. To Lock The Liftgate NOTE: With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft • Do not exceed the maximum power of (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo- 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex- cated to the right of the outside handle re- Front Power Outlet ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will lease will lock the vehicle. need to be replaced. • This power outlet is located in the drivers NOTE: side rear cargo area. The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. 51 • Power outlets are designed for accessory Power Inverter — If Equipped plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Body Computer Fuses F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet. Power Inverter

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter outlet located on the back of the center Engine Compartment Fuses console. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power de- F18 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Cargo Power vices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Outlet. • To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.

52 NOTE: The power inverter is designed with built-in WARNING! overload protection. If the power rating of To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT: 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter • insert any objects into the receptacles will automatically shut down. Once the elec- • touch with wet hands trical device has been removed from the out- Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet let, the inverter should automatically reset. If is mishandled, it may cause an electric the power rating exceeds approximately shock and failure. 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

53 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .56 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND Gray Indicator Lights ...... 67 Instrument Cluster Display Controls ....56 MESSAGES...... 58 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Oil Change Reset ...... 57 Red Warning Lights...... 59 (OBDII)...... 67 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 62 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Items ...... 57 Yellow Indicator Lights ...... 65 Cybersecurity ...... 67 White Indicator Lights ...... 66 TRIP COMPUTER ...... 58 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Blue Indicator Lights ...... 66 MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....68 Green Indicator Lights ...... 66

55 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Instrument Cluster Display Controls The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the DISPLAY instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru- the left side of the steering wheel allows the ment cluster display, which offers useful in- driver to select vehicle information and Per- formation to the driver. With the ignition in sonal Settings. the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a • Push the up arrow button to scroll upward door will activate the display for viewing, and through the main menus and submenus display the total miles, or kilometers, in the (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, odometer. Your instrument cluster display is Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages, designed to display important information Screen Set Up). about your vehicle’s systems and features. • Push the down arrow button to scroll down- Using a driver interactive display located on ward through the main menu and sub- the instrument panel, your instrument clus- menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver ter display can show you how systems are Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes- working and give you warnings when they sages, Screen Set Up). aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls Instrument Cluster Display Controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main • Push the right arrow button to access the menus and submenus. You can access the 1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through information screens or submenu screens of specific information you want and make se- Menus And Submenus a main menu item. lections and adjustments. 2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens • Push the back/left arrow button to access 3 — OK Button For Selecting And Re- the information screens or submenu setting Information screens of a main menu item. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

56 • Push the OK button to access/select the Unless reset, this message will continue to Instrument Cluster Display Selectable information screens or submenu screens of display each time you turn the ignition is Items a main menu item. Push and hold the OK cycled to the ON or RUN position. To reset The instrument cluster display can be used to arrow button for two seconds to reset the oil change indicator system (after per- view the following main menu items: displayed/selected features that can be forming the scheduled maintenance), refer to reset. the following procedure: NOTE: Oil Change Reset 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. the ENGINE START/STOP button and Oil Change Due cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position • Speedometer • Stop & Start – If Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil (do not start the engine). Equipped change indicator system. The “Oil Change • Vehicle Info • Audio 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, Due” message will display in the instrument • Driver Assist • Messages three times within 10 seconds. cluster display for five seconds after a single • Fuel Economy • Screen Setup chime has sounded to indicate the next 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push • Trip • Settings scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change indicator system is duty cycle based, return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK NOTE: which means the engine oil change interval position. Refer to your Owner's Manual for further may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal information. driving style. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. See an authorized dealer to have the oil life reset.

57 TRIP COMPUTER Average Consumption WARNING/INDICATOR The Trip computer is used to display informa- • Represents the average fuel consumption LIGHTS AND MESSAGES tion on car operation when the key is turned since the start of the new trip. The warning/indicator light switches on in the to the RUN position. Travel Time instrument panel together with a dedicated This function allows you to define two sepa- • Elapsed time since the start of the new trip. message and/or acoustic signal when appli- rate trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where cable. These indications are indicative and OK Button the car's "complete trips" are monitored in an precautionary and as such must not be con- independent manner. Short Push Of The Button: display of various sidered as exhaustive and/or alternative to Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new parameters. the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read care- trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa- OK button on the steering wheel controls. and begin a new trip. tion in this chapter in the event of a failure “Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the New trip indication. figures relating to: Starts after reset: • Distance Travelled All active telltales will display first, if appli- • "Manual" by pushing the OK button. cable. The system check menu may appear • Average Consumption different based upon equipment options and • Travel Time (driving time) • "Automatic" when the "distance" reaches current vehicle status. Some telltales are the value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when optional and may not appear. Quantities Displayed the "time travel" reaches the value of The following warning lamps and indicators Distance Travelled 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes). will alert you to a vehicle condition that may • Indicates the distance travelled by the start • After each disconnection and reconnection become serious. Some lamps will illuminate of the new trip. of the battery. when you start your vehicle to make sure they

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. 58 Red Warning Lights If the light remains on when the parking NOTE: brake has been disengaged, and the fluid The light may flash momentarily during sharp — Air Bag Warning Light level is at the full mark on the master cylinder cornering maneuvers, which change fluid This light will turn on for four to eight seconds reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy- level conditions. The vehicle should have as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in draulic system malfunction or that a problem service performed, and the brake fluid level the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the with the Brake Booster has been detected by checked. the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec- light is either not on during startup, stays on, If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this or turns on while driving, have the system is necessary. inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as case, the light will remain on until the condi- possible. This light will illuminate with a tion has been corrected. If the problem is WARNING! single chime when a fault with the Air Bag related to the brake booster, the ABS pump Warning Light has been detected, it will stay will run when applying the brake, and a brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. on is dangerous. Part of the brake system on intermittently or remains on while driving, may have failed. It will take longer to stop The dual brake system provides a reserve have an authorized dealer service the vehicle the vehicle. You could have a collision. braking capacity in the event of a failure to a immediately. Have the vehicle checked immediately. portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in — Brake Warning Light either half of the dual brake system is indi- Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake (English) — Brake Warning Light (Met- cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec- ric) turn on when the brake fluid level in the tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the master cylinder has dropped below a speci- event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning This light monitors various brake functions, fied level. Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. including brake fluid level and parking brake Immediate repair to the ABS system is re- application. If the brake light turns on it may The light will remain on until the cause is quired. indicate that the parking brake is applied, corrected. that the brake fluid level is low, or that there Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be is a problem with the anti-lock brake system checked by turning the ignition switch from reservoir. the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. 59 The light should illuminate for approximately NOTE: depending on the nature of the problem. two seconds. The light should then turn off If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely unless the parking brake is applied or a brake single chime. and completely stopped and the transmission fault is detected. If the light does not illumi- is placed in the PARK position. The light — Electric Power Steering Fault nate, have the light inspected by your autho- should turn off. If the light remains on with rized dealer. Warning Light the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually The light also will turn on when the parking This light will turn on when there's a fault be drivable; however, see an authorized brake is applied with the ignition switch in with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) sys- dealer for service as soon as possible. the ON/RUN position. tem. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting NOTE: And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and further information. This light shows only that the parking brake is brake pedals are pressed at the same time. applied. It does not show the degree of brake If the light continues to flash when the ve- application. WARNING! hicle is running, immediate service is re- — Battery Charge Warning Light Continued operation with reduced assist quired and you may experience reduced per- could pose a safety risk to yourself and formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine This light illuminates when the battery is not others. Service should be obtained as soon stall and your vehicle may require towing. charging properly. If it stays on while the as possible. engine is running, there may be a malfunc- The light will come on when the ignition is tion with the charging system. Contact an placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi- authorized dealer as soon as possible. — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, Warning Light This indicates a possible problem with the have the system checked by an authorized electrical system or a related component. This light informs you of a problem with the dealer. — Door Open Warning Light Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL problem is detected while the vehicle is run- This indicator will illuminate when a door is ning, the light will either stay on or flash ajar/open and not fully closed. 60 — Engine Temperature Warning Light — Oil Pressure Warning Light — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to warn of This warning light will illuminate to indicate This light indicates when the driver or pas- an overheated engine condition. If the engine low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on senger seat belt is unbuckled. When the coolant temperature is too high, this light will while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or illuminate and a single chime will sound. the engine as soon as possible. A chime will ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat sound when this light turns on. belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull light will turn on. When driving, if the driver Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck- corrected. This light does not indicate how on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the remain on continuously and a chime will must be checked under the hood. temperature reading does not return to nor- sound. mal, turn the engine off immediately and call — Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over- Warning Light “Safety” for further information. heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further This light will illuminate if there is a failure of information. — Transmission Fault Warning Light — the oil pressure sensor. If this light illumi- If Equipped — Hood Open Warning Light nates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it. This light will illuminate (together with a This indicator will illuminate when the hood message in the instrument cluster display is left open and not fully closed. — Oil Temperature Warning Light and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. NOTE: This warning light will illuminate to indicate Contact your authorized dealer if the message If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a the engine oil temperature is high. If the light remains after restarting the engine. single chime. turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait — Liftgate Open Warning Light for oil temperature to return to normal levels. This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is left open and not fully closed. 61 — Vehicle Security Warning Light — If If the ABS light does not turn on when the — LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ Equipped RUN position, have the brake system in- This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- The LaneSense system provides the driver spected by an authorized dealer. mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security with visual and steering torque warnings alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly — Audio System Failure Light — If when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane until the vehicle is disarmed. Equipped unintentionally without the use of a turn signal. YellowWarning Lights This light will illuminate to report a failure of the Audio System. Contact an authorized • When the LaneSense system senses a lane — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning dealership as soon as possible. drift situation, the LaneSense indicator Light changes from solid green to solid yellow. — Electronic Park Brake Warning This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- Light • When the LaneSense system senses the tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the lane has been approached and is in a lane ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ This warning light will illuminate to indicate departure situation, the LaneSense indica- RUN position and may stay on for as long as the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning tor changes from solid white/green to flash- properly and service is required. Contact an four seconds. ing yellow. authorized dealer. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while • Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the — Icy Road Condition Indicator Light “Starting And Operating” for further information. brake system is not functioning and service is — If Equipped required as soon as possible. However, the This light will illuminate during an icy road — Service LaneSense Warning Light conventional brake system will continue to condition. — If Equipped operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn- — Low Fuel Warning Light ing Light is not also on. This warning light will illuminate when the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When the fuel level reaches approximately LaneSense system is not operating and re- 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, quires service. Please see an authorized and remain on until fuel is added. dealer. 62 — Engine Check/Malfunction Indica- — Service Stop/Start System Warning WARNING! tor Warning Light (MIL) Light — If Equipped The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as This warning light will illuminate when the referenced above, can reach higher tem- Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic Stop/Start system is not functioning properly peratures than in normal operating condi- System called OBD II that monitors engine and service is required. Contact an autho- tions. This can cause a fire if you drive rized dealer for service. and automatic transmission control systems. slowly or park over flammable substances This warning light will illuminate when the such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. — Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition is in the ON/RUN position before This could result in death or serious injury (TPMS) Warning Light engine start. If the bulb does not come on to the driver, occupants or others. when turning the ignition switch from OFF to The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure ON/RUN, have the condition checked CAUTION! promptly. is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these The vehicle should be serviced if the light Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam- cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con- stays on through several typical driving age to the vehicle control system. It also sumption may not be guaranteed. styles. In most situations, the vehicle will could affect fuel economy and driveability. Should one or more tires be in the condition drive normally and will not require towing. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic mentioned above, the display will show the When the engine is running, the MIL may converter damage and power loss will soon indications corresponding to each tire in flash to alert serious conditions that could occur. Immediate service is required. sequence. lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle CAUTION! should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compro- mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture

63 and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning CAUTION! also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- occurs, repair immediately using the dedi- life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling tion telltale after replacing one or more tires cated tire repair kit and contact your au- and stopping ability. or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the thorized dealer as soon as possible. replacement or alternate tires and wheels Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute allow the TPMS to continue to function Each tire, including the spare (if provided), for proper tire maintenance, and it is the properly. should be checked monthly when cold and driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire inflated to the inflation pressure recom- pressure, even if under-inflation has not mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the reached the level to trigger illumination of the CAUTION! vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS has been optimized for the bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different Your vehicle has also been equipped with a original equipment tires and wheels. size than the size indicated on the vehicle TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when TPMS pressures and warning have been placard or tire inflation pressure label, you established for the tire size equipped on the system is not operating properly. The should determine the proper tire inflation your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined pressure for those tires.) tion or sensor damage may result when with the low tire pressure telltale. When the using replacement equipment that is not As an added safety feature, your vehicle has system detects a malfunction, the telltale will of the same size, type, and/or style. After- been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor- flash for approximately one minute and then market wheels can cause sensor damage. ing System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire remain continuously illuminated. This se- Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause pressure telltale when one or more of your quence will continue upon subsequent ve- the Tire Pressure Monitoring System tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af- ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- exists. When the malfunction indicator is ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is minates, you should stop and check your tires illuminated, the system may not be able to recommended that you take your vehicle as soon as possible, and inflate them to the detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. to your authorized dealer to have your

GETTING TO KNOW YOURproper INSTRUMENT PANEL pressure. Driving on a significantly TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of sensor function checked. under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the ve- 64 — Towing Hook Breakdown Warning • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the CAUTION! Light — If Equipped “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the This light illuminates when there is a failure Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. with the tow hook. Contact your authorized will eventually cause severe transmission dealer for service. • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- damage or transmission failure. ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; — Transmission Temperature Warning the sounds will stop when ESC becomes Light YellowIndicator Lights inactive. This light indicates that the transmission — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) • This light will come on when the vehicle is fluid temperature is running hot. This may Active Warning Light — If Equipped in an ESC event. occur with severe usage, such as trailer tow- This light will indicate when the Electronic — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off ing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Warning Light — If Equipped stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will This light indicates the Electronic Stability into PARK and run the engine at idle or come on when the ignition is placed in the Control (ESC) is off. slightly higher until the light turns off. ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN WARNING! engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, If you continue operating the vehicle when comes on continuously with the engine run- even if it was turned off previously. ning, a malfunction has been detected in the the Transmission Temperature Warning — Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light Light is illuminated you could cause the ESC system. If this light remains on after — If Equipped fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has engine or exhaust components and cause a been driven several miles (kilometers) at This light will illuminate when there is a fire. speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs. an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

65 — Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If — Set Speed Warning Light — If of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If Equipped Equipped the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to This warning light will illuminate after an When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the pass" scenario. accident has occurred, and the system has speed warning telltale will illuminate in the shut the fuel off. instrument cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is ex- — Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Green Indicator Lights ceeded, a single chime will sound along with Alarm Indicator Light pop up message of speed warning exceeded. — Automatic High Beam Indicator This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle Speed Warning can be turned on and off in Light — If Equipped security alarm system has detected an at- the instrument cluster display, for further This indicator shows that the automatic high tempt to break into the vehicle. information refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- beam headlights are on. play Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your White Indicator Lights Instrument Panel.” — Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped — Cruise Control ON Indicator — If The number “55” is only an example of a Equipped speed that can be set. This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed This light will turn on when the speed control Blue Indicator Lights Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur- is ready, but not set. ther information. — High Beam Indicator Light — Light Sensor Failure — Front Fog Indicator Light — If This indicator light will illuminate to indicate Equipped This light illuminates when there is light that the high beam headlights are on. With sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have the low beams activated, push the multifunc- This indicator light will illuminate when the an authorized dealer inspect it. tion lever forward (toward the front of the front fog lights are on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear

66 — Hazard Warning Lights • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb nostic codes and other information to assist if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. your service technician in making repairs. The hazard warning indicators light up when Although your vehicle will usually be drivable the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch Gray Indicator Lights and not need towing, see your authorized has been pushed. — Electronic Speed Control Canceled dealer for service as soon as possible. — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light Indicator Light CAUTION! This indicator light will illuminate when the This light will turn on when the speed control park lights or headlights are turned on. has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission — Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — "Speed Control — If Equipped" in "Starting control system. It could also affect fuel If Equipped and Operating" for further information. economy and driveability. The vehicle This indicator light will illuminate when the ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC must be serviced before any emissions Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode. tests can be performed. SYSTEM (OBD II) • If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is — Turn Signal Indicator Lights Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated running, severe catalytic converter dam- When the left or right turn signal is activated, onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. age and power loss will soon occur. Im- mediate service is required. the turn signal indicator will flash indepen- This system monitors the performance of the dently and the corresponding exterior turn emissions, engine, and automatic transmis- signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be sion control systems. When these systems are Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) activated when the multifunction lever is operating properly, your vehicle will provide Cybersecurity moved down (left) or up (right). excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard NOTE: government regulations. Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection • A continuous chime will sound if the ve- If any of these systems require service, the port to allow access to information related to hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction the performance of your emissions controls. with either turn signal on. Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diag- 67 Authorized service technicians may need to EMISSIONS INSPECTION Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated access this information to assist with the AND MAINTENANCE test, which you can use prior to going to the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II emissions system. PROGRAMS system is ready, you must do the following: In some localities, it may be a legal require- 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi- WARNING! ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's tion, but do not crank or start the engine. emissions control system. Failure to pass • ONLY an authorized service technician could prevent vehicle registration. NOTE: should connect equipment to the OBD II If you crank or start the engine, you will connection port in order to read the VIN, For states that require an Inspec- have to start this test over. diagnose, or service your vehicle. tion and Maintenance (I/M), this • If unauthorized equipment is connected check verifies the “Malfunction 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to to the OBD II connection port, such as a Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is the ON position, you will see the “Mal- driver-behavior tracking device, it may: not on when the engine is running, and that function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol • Be possible that vehicle systems, the OBD II system is ready for testing. come on as part of a normal bulb check. including safety related systems, Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of could be impaired or a loss of ve- The OBD II system may not be ready if your two things will happen: hicle control could occur that may vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a result in an accident involving seri- • The MIL will flash for about ten seconds dead battery or a battery replacement. If the ous injury or death. and then return to being fully illuminated OBD II system should be determined not • Access, or allow others to access, until you turn OFF the ignition or start the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail information stored in your vehicle engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD the test. systems, including personal infor- II system is not ready and you should not mation. proceed to the I/M station.

GETTING TO KNOW YOURFor INSTRUMENT PANEL further information, refer to “Cybersecu- rity” in “Multimedia”.

68 • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain battery failure or replacement, you may need should have your vehicle serviced before go- fully illuminated until you place the igni- to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail tion in the off position or start the engine. you normally would in order for your OBD II your vehicle because the MIL is on with the This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys- system to update. A recheck with the above engine running. tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M test routine may then indicate that the sys- station. tem is now ready. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi- your vehicle was recently serviced or had a nated during normal vehicle operation you

69 70 SAFETY

SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES ...... 72 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SAFETY TIPS ...... 119 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 72 SYSTEMS...... 89 Transporting Passengers ...... 119 Electronic Brake Control System .....73 Occupant Restraint Systems ...... 89 Exhaust Gas ...... 120 Important Safety Precautions ...... 89 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . .81 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Seat Belt Systems ...... 90 Vehicle ...... 120 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 81 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .97 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .....82 Child Restraints ...... 108 Outside The Vehicle...... 122 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .83 Transporting Pets ...... 119

71 • Brake pedal pulsations. SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end condition of the vehicle brakes and tires Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) of the stop. or the traction afforded. SAFETY The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides These are all normal characteristics of ABS. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in- increased vehicle stability and brake perfor- cluding those resulting from excessive mance under most braking conditions. The WARNING! speed in turns, following another vehicle system automatically prevents wheel lock, too closely, or hydroplaning. and enhances vehicle control during braking. • The ABS contains sophisticated elec- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped tronic equipment that may be suscep- vehicle must never be exploited in a The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en- tible to interference caused by improp- reckless or dangerous manner that could sure that the ABS is working properly each erly installed or high output radio jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety time the vehicle is started and driven. During transmitting equipment. This interfer- of others. this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock sound as well as some related motor noises. braking capability. Installation of such ABS is designed to function with the OEM ABS is activated during braking when the equipment should be performed by tires. Modification may result in degraded system detects one or more wheels begin to qualified professionals. ABS performance. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the or panic stops may increase the likelihood of The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” stopping distance longer. Just press ABS activation(s). will turn on when the ignition is turned to the firmly on your brake pedal when you ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as You also may experience the following when need to slow down or stop. four seconds. ABS activates: • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re- • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to nor can it increase braking or steering mains on or comes on while driving, it indi- run for a short time after the stop). efficiency beyond that afforded by the cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. system is not functioning and that service is 72 required. However, the conventional brake Brake Assist System (BAS) system will continue to operate normally if WARNING! The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on. speed in turns, driving on very slippery braking capability during emergency braking surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, maneuvers. The system detects an emer- of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be the brake system should be serviced as soon gency braking situation by sensing the rate exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock and amount of brake application and then ner, which could jeopardize the user's brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This safety or the safety of others. Light” does not come on when the ignition is can help reduce braking distances. The BAS turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light complements the anti-lock brake system repaired as soon as possible. (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re- Hill Start Assist (HSA) Electronic Brake Control System sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive The HSA system is designed to help the driver the benefit of the system, you must apply Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop continuous braking pressure during the stop- Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This while on an incline. If the driver releases the ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). system includes Anti-Lock Brake System brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start continue to hold the brake pressure for a braking is no longer desired. Once the brake Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), short period. If the driver does not apply the Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec- pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. throttle before this time expires, the system tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems will release brake pressure and the vehicle work together to enhance both vehicle stabil- WARNING! will roll down the hill as normal. The system ity and control in various driving conditions. will release brake pressure in proportion to The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot Your vehicle may also be equipped with prevent the natural laws of physics from amount of throttle applied. Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase The following conditions must be met in Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control the traction afforded by prevailing road order for HSA to activate: (HDC). conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive • The vehicle must be stopped.

73 • The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) NOTE: grade or greater hill. WARNING! TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- • The gear selection must match vehicle up- Always use caution when towing a trailer and ings can result in a collision or serious hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- SAFETY personal injury. forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. REVERSE gear). Disabling and Enabling HSA • For vehicles equipped with an automatic When TSC is functioning, the “ESC This feature can be turned on or turned off. transmission, the HSA will work in RE- Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will VERSE gear and all forward gears. The To change the current setting, proceed as flash, the engine power may be reduced and system will not activate if the transmission follows: you may feel the brakes being applied to is in PARK. • For vehicles equipped with the instrument individual wheels to attempt to stop the cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when WARNING! Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. ment Panel” for further information. There may be situations where the Hill WARNING! Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped slight rolling may occur, such as on minor If TSC activates while driving, slow the hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for an excessively swaying trailer and will take location, and adjust the trailer load to active driving involvement. It is always the the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the eliminate trailer sway. driver’s responsibility to be attentive to sway. The system may reduce engine power distance to other vehicles, people, and and apply the brake of the appropriate Electronic Stability Control (ESC) objects, and most importantly brake op- wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. This system enhances directional control and eration to ensure safe operation of the TSC will become active automatically once stability of the vehicle under various driving vehicle under all road conditions. Your an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. complete attention is always required conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or while driving to maintain safe control of understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in 74 counteracting the oversteer or understeer the accelerator and apply as little throttle as condition. Engine power may also be reduced possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and WARNING! to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. driving to the prevailing road conditions. hicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine WARNING! the steering system, suspension, brak- the vehicle path intended by the driver and ing system, tire type and size or wheel compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can- size may adversely affect ESC perfor- When the actual path does not match the not prevent the natural laws of physics mance. Improperly inflated and unintended path, ESC applies the brake of the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting increase the traction afforded by prevail- performance. Any vehicle modification the oversteer or understeer condition. ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC sys- • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning accidents, including those resulting tem can increase the risk of loss of more than appropriate for the steering from excessive speed in turns, driving on vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per- wheel position. very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents re- sonal injury and death. • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning sulting from loss of vehicle control due less than appropriate for the steering wheel to inappropriate driver input for the con- position. ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill- ESC Operation Modes ful driver can prevent accidents. The The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator To disable ESC and other safety systems, capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle Light” located in the instrument cluster will follow the instruction below. must never be exploited in a reckless or start to flash as soon as the ESC system dangerous manner which could jeopar- There are three modes of active safety sys- becomes active. The “ESC Activation/ dize the user’s safety or the safety of tems present on the vehicle: Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes others. • ESC On when the TCS is active. If the “ESC • Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop- Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be- erly maintain your vehicle, may change • Partial Off gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the handling characteristics of your ve- • Full Off

75 ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light Range Range will turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

SAFETY This is the normal operating mode for ESC The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode NOTE: is also the normal mode for operating a four- raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activa- To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH tion, which allows for more wheel spin than with snow chains, or when starting off in deep range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On” what ESC normally allows. snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to mode whenever the vehicle is started or the switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momen- power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted tarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is used for most driving situations. ESC should overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Par- done while the vehicle is in motion. tial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional information. WARNING!

NOTE: • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS It is recommended to select the mode "Partial functionality of ESC, (except for the lim- Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons. ited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- ESC OFF Button nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta- push the “ESC Off” button and the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate. To turn the 76 automatically switches to “Partial Off” mode, • The “ESC OFF” message will display and a WARNING! described above. When the vehicle speed chime will sound when the gear selector is bility offered by the ESC system is re- returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the moved from any position to the PARK posi- duced. ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. tion and then moved out of the PARK posi- • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled The ESC OFF indicator light is always illumi- tion. This will occur even if the message when the ESC system is in the “Partial nated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, was cleared previously. Off” mode. momentarily push the “ESC Off” button. This Selec-Terrain — If Equipped Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the High And 4WD Low Range operation. activation of some driving modes provide par- The “Full Off” mode is intended for off- NOTE: tial off or full off of some active safety sys- highway and off-road use when ESC stability With the ESC switched off, the enhanced tems in order to optimize performance in features could inhibit vehicle maneuverabil- vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail- specific modes. ity due to trail conditions. The “ESC Off” able. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in main- Partial or full off of the active safety systems button is located in the lower switch bank will be indicated by a light in the instrument taining stability. “Full Off” mode is only in- above the climate control panel. To enter cluster. “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC tended for off-highway or off-road use. Off” button for five seconds while the vehicle In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety sys- NOTE: is stopped with the engine running. After five tems are partially disabled and put in place to seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illu- • “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ensure maximum performance in the specific minate and an “ESC Off” message will ap- ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system mode of operation. However, you can reacti- pear in the odometer. will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is vate them completely at any time by pushing started in 4WD LOW range or the power the ESC button. In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW (except for the “limited slip” feature de- NOTE: range. scribed in the TCS section) until the vehicle In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At completely bypassed in order to ensure maxi- speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system mum off-road performance. 77 ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light during acceleration, ease up on the accelera- Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) And ESC OFF Indicator Light tor and apply as little throttle as possible. Be This system anticipates the potential for sure to adapt your speed and driving to the wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering The “ESC Activation/ prevailing road conditions. SAFETY wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. Malfunction Indicator Light” in NOTE: When ERM determines that the rate of the instrument cluster will come change of the steering wheel angle and vehi- • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator on when the ignition switch is Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” cle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause turned to the ON position. It come on momentarily each time the igni- wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate should go out with the engine running. If the tion switch is turned ON. brake and may also reduce engine power to “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. Light” comes on continuously with the en- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ERM will only intervene during very severe or gine running, a malfunction has been de- ESC system will be ON even if it was turned evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only tected in the ESC system. If this light re- off previously. reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring mains on after several ignition cycles, and • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It the vehicle has been driven several miles/ ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph the sounds will stop when ESC becomes such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon inactive following the maneuver that or striking objects or other vehicles. as possible to have the problem diagnosed caused the ESC activation. and corrected. NOTE: The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator indicates the Electronic Stability Off” mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Con- Light” (located in the instrument cluster) Control (ESC) is partially off or trol (ESC) in this section for a complete starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac- full off. explanation of the available ESC modes. tion and the ESC system becomes active. The The ESC OFF switch is located in the center “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator console. Light” also flashes when Traction Control System is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash 78 brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped WARNING! more engine torque to be applied to the wheel Many factors, such as vehicle loading, that is not spinning. This feature remains road conditions, and driving conditions, active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial influence the chance that wheel lift or Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitiga- “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this tion (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or section for further information. rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) other vehicles. The capabilities of an The DST function uses the integration of the ERM-equipped vehicle must never be ex- ESC system with the electric power steering ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, to increase the safety level of the whole car. which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip condi- Traction Control System (TCS) tions), through the DST function the ESC system controls the steering to implement an This system monitors the amount of wheel additional torque contribution on the steering Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk) spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver HDC is intended for low speed off road driving spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to to the driver. The coordinated action of while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is brakes and steering increases the safety and vehicle speed while descending hills during reduced to provide enhanced acceleration car control feeling. various driving situations. HDC controls ve- and stability. A feature of the TCS system, hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions NOTE: similar to a limited slip differential and con- The DST is a driving aid system and does not HDC has three states: trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If replace the driver’s actions while driving the 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster car. activate). than the other, the system will apply the 79 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but Driver Override: • The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph activation conditions are not met, or (40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.) The driver may override HDC activation with driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle or brake application at anytime. Feedback To The Driver: throttle application). SAFETY 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively Deactivating HDC The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to controlling vehicle speed). HDC will be deactivated but remain available the driver about the state HDC is in. Enabling HDC if any of the following conditions occur: • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu- • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, minate and remain solid when HDC is en- or brake application. but the following conditions must also be met abled or activated. This is the normal oper- to enable HDC: • Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) ating condition for HDC. but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h). • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. • The switch lamp will flash for several sec- • Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h). • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi- onds then extinguish when the driver cient magnitude (less than approximately pushes the HDC switch when enable con- • Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released. 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill ditions have not been met. • Driver’s door is closed. grade. The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Activating HDC • Vehicle is shifted to PARK. Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position. Once HDC is enabled, it will activate auto- Disabling HDC matically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any WARNING! The set speed for HDC is selectable by the of the following conditions occur: HDC is only intended to assist the driver in driver and can be adjusted using brake and • The driver pushes the HDC switch. controlling vehicle speed when descend- throttle input. • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low ing hills. The driver must remain attentive Range. to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Driver’s door opens. 80 AUXILIARY DRIVING Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to SYSTEMS “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Blind Spot Monitoring Owner’s Manual for further information. General Information The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside The following regulatory statement applies to the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo- this vehicle: torcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. Rear Detection Zones Rules and with Industry Canada license- The BSM detection zone covers approxi- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- mately one lane width on both sides of the When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning ject to the following two conditions: vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at light will momentarily illuminate in both out- 1. This device may not cause harmful the outside mirror and extends approximately side rear view mirrors to let the driver know interference. that the system is operational. The BSM 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the 2. This device must accept any interference system sensors operate when the vehicle is in vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec- received, including interference that may any forward gear or REVERSE and enters tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when cause undesired operation. the vehicle speed reaches approximately stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. NOTE: 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the The BSM system notifies the driver of objects Changes or modifications not expressly ap- driver of vehicles in these areas. in the detection zones by illuminating the proved by the party responsible for compli- BSM warning light located in the outside ance could void the user’s authority to oper- mirrors in addition to sounding an audible ate the equipment. (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.

81 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) • To turn the FCW system back on, press the Far forward collision button again to turn the The far setting provides warnings for poten- The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System system on. with Mitigation provides the driver with au- tial collisions more distant in front of the

SAFETY dible warnings, visual warnings (within the NOTE: vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most instrument cluster display), and may apply a • The default status of FCW is “Warning + reaction time to avoid a collision. brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a Active Braking,” this allows the system to More cautious drivers that do not mind fre- warn you of a possible collision with the potential frontal collision. The warnings and quent warnings may prefer this setting. limited braking are intended to provide the vehicle in front of you and enable the active driver with enough time to react, avoid or braking. NOTE: mitigate the potential collision. • Changing the FCW status to “off” deacti- This setting gives you the most reaction time. vates the system, so no warning or active NOTE: Medium braking will be available in case of a pos- FCW monitors the information from the for- sible collision The default setting is "Medium". This setting ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic provides that the system notify the driver of a Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob- • Changing the FCW status to “Only warning” possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it ability of a forward collision. When the sys- prevents the system from providing limited when the latter is at a standard distance, tem determines that a forward collision is active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the intermediate between the other two possible probable, the driver will be provided with event of a potential frontal collision, but settings. audible and visual warnings and may provide maintains the audible and visual warnings. a brake jerk warning. Near Changing FCW Status Turning FCW On Or Off The FCW feature has three settings and can By changing the option to "Near", the system The forward collision menu setting is located be changed within the Uconnect System will warn the driver of a possible accident in the Uconnect settings. Screen: with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a • To turn the FCW system off, press the • Far forward collision button once to turn the • Medium system off. • Near 82 reaction time to the driver lower than the General Information The tire pressure will vary with temperature settings "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F The following regulatory statement applies to potential accident, while a more dynamic (6.5°C). This means that when the outside all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in driving of the vehicle. temperature decreases, the tire pressure will this vehicle: decrease. Tire pressure should always be set NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is Changing the Active Braking status to “off” Rules and with Industry Canada license- defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle prevents the system from providing autono- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- has not been driven for at least three hours, or mous braking, or additional brake support if ject to the following two conditions: driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three the driver is not braking adequately in the hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure event of a potential frontal collision. Active 1. This device may not cause harmful must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- braking can be turned “off” in the Uconnect interference. sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to controls settings. 2. This device must accept any interference “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the Refer to your Owner's Manual for further received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also details. increase as the vehicle is driven. This is NOTE: normal and there should be no adjustment for WARNING! Changes or modifications not expressly ap- this increased pressure. proved by the party responsible for compli- Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire intended to avoid a collision on its own, ance could void the user’s authority to oper- pressure if the tire pressure falls below the nor can FCW detect every type of potential ate the equipment. low-pressure warning limit for any reason, collision. The driver has the responsibility Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) including low temperature effects and natu- to avoid a collision by controlling the ve- ral pressure loss through the tire. hicle via braking and steering. Failure to The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) follow this warning could lead to serious will warn the driver of a low tire pressure injury or death. based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. 83 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) low tire pressure as long as the condition and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi CAUTION! exists, and will not turn off until the tire (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) established for the tire size equipped on pressure is at or above the recommended will decrease the tire pressure to approxi- your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- SAFETY cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres- mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is tion or sensor damage may result when sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure using replacement equipment that is not tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the ve- of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on tire pressure to the recommended cold plac- hicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to aftermarket wheels, and may contribute ard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire to a poor overall system performance. Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still Customers are encouraged to use OEM be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure NOTE: wheels to assure TPMS feature opera- Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may tion. need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s • Using aftermarket tire sealants may (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- recommended cold placard pressure value. cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure NOTE: tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- Monitoring Telltale Light off. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take The system will automatically update and the need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi your vehicle to an authorized dealer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- have your sensor function checked. turn off once the system receives the updated ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure • After inspecting or adjusting the tire tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be Monitoring Telltale Light off. pressure always reinstall the valve stem driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive CAUTION! from entering the valve stem, which this information. • The TPMS has been optimized for the could damage the TPMS sensor. For example, your vehicle may have a recom- original equipment tires and wheels. mended cold (parked for more than three TPMS pressures and warning have been hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). 84 NOTE: Base System strument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and a chime will sound • The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) when tire pressure is low in one or more of the mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro- uses wireless technology with wheel rim four active road tires. Should this occur, you vide warning of a tire failure or condition. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire should stop as soon as possible, check the pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each • The TPMS should not be used as a tire inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom- pressure. pressure readings to the receiver module. mended cold placard pressure value as • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire NOTE: shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once causes the tire to overheat and can lead to It is particularly important for you to check the system receives the updated tire pres- tire failure. Underinflation also reduces the tire pressure in all of the tires on your sures, the system will automatically update fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping pressure. Light” will turn off. ability. The TPMS consists of the following compo- NOTE: • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire nents: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon- need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi • Receiver Module. sibility to maintain correct tire pressure (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure if underinflation has not reached the level • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn- Monitoring Telltale Light”. 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to ings • Seasonal temperature changes will affect receive this information. TPMS information on your instrument Service TPMS Warning The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- cluster. tale Light” will illuminate in the in- When a system fault is detected, the “Tire strument cluster, a “LOW TIRE Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash PRESSURE” message will display in the in- on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 85 solid. The system fault will also sound a 2. If you install the compact or non- tires. The vehicle may need to be driven chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence matching full size spare tire in place of a for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph will repeat, providing the system fault still road tire that has a pressure below the (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale low-pressure warning limit, a chime will this information. SAFETY Light” will turn off when the fault condition sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation no longer exists. A system fault can occur due “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to to any of the following: XX" messages will turn on upon the next The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) • Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- ignition cycle. uses wireless technology with wheel rim ing next to facilities emitting the same 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire Telltale Light” will flash on and off for • Installing some form of aftermarket window pressure readings to the receiver module. tinting that affects radio wave signals. 75 seconds and then remain on solid. NOTE: • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a It is particularly important for you to check wheel housings. chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale the tire pressure in all of the tires on your Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds • Using tire chains on the vehicle. vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper and then remain on solid. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with pressure. 5. Once you repair or replace the original TPMS sensors. The TPMS consists of the following compo- road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in nents: Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching place of the compact spare or non- Full Size Spare matching full size spare, the TPMS will • Receiver Module. 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching update automatically and the “TPMS Tell- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. tale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire full size spare tire does not have a tire • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, pressure is below the low-pressure warn- messages, which display in the instrument the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in ing limit in any of the four active road cluster. the spare tire. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. 86 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn- the instrument cluster will return to their ings original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitor- ing Telltale Light” will turn off. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- NOTE: tale Light” will illuminate in the in- When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may strument cluster and a chime will need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi sound when tire pressure is low in one or (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- more of the four active road tires. In addition, ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may Low" message for a minimum of five seconds need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above and a graphic showing the pressure values of 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to each tire with the low tire pressure values in a receive this information. different color. Service TPMS Warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Warning Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on Should this occur, you should stop as soon as solid. The system fault will also sound a possible and inflate the tires with low pres- chime. In addition, the instrument cluster sure (those in a different color in the instru- will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes- ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom- sage for a minimum of five seconds and then mended cold placard pressure value as display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once value to indicate which sensor is not being the system receives the updated tire pres- received. sures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the 87 “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. 2. If you install the compact or non- no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS- In addition, the instrument cluster will matching full size spare tire in place of a TEM” message will no longer display, and a display a Tire Low message, an "Inflate to road tire that has a pressure below the pressure value will display in place of the XX" message and a graphic showing the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next SAFETY dashes. A system fault can occur due to any low tire pressure value in a different color. ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale of the following: 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- Light” will remain on and a chime will • Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS sound. In addition, the graphic in the ing next to facilities emitting the same Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no instrument cluster will still display a dif- radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. tire pressure is below the low-pressure ferent color pressure value and an "Inflate • Installing some form of aftermarket window warning limit in any of the four active road to XX" message. tinting that affects radio wave signals. tires. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or 4. The instrument cluster will display a utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS wheel housings. graphic showing the tire pressure value in Telltale Light” will flash on and off for • Using tire chains on the vehicle. the same color as the other pressure val- 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will dis- • Using wheels/tires not equipped with ues in place of the different color low tire play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message TPMS sensors. pressure value. The instrument cluster will also display a dedicated message to for five seconds and then display dashes Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare remind you to service the flat tire. (- -) in place of the pressure value. 1. The matching full size spare wheel and 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching tire assembly has a tire pressure monitor- chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale Full Size Spare ing sensor that can be monitored by the Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds TPMS. 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching and then remain on solid, and the instru- 2. If you install the full size spare in place of full size does not have a tire pressure ment cluster will display a “SERVICE a road tire that has a pressure below the monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds low-pressure warning limit, a chime will will not monitor the pressure in the com- and then display dashes (- -) in place of sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will pact spare tire. the pressure value. 88 5. Once you repair or replace the original (2) This device must accept any interference Important Safety Precautions road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in received, including interference that may Please pay close attention to the information place of the compact spare or non- cause undesired operation. in this section. It tells you how to use your matching full size, the TPMS will update NOTE: restraint system properly, to keep you and automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Changes or modifications not expressly ap- your passengers as safe as possible. Telltale Light” will turn off and the proved by the party responsible for compli- graphic in the instrument cluster will dis- Here are some simple steps you can take to ance could void the user’s authority to oper- play a new pressure value instead of minimize the risk of harm from a deploying ate the equipment. dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is air bag: below the low-pressure warning limit in 1. Children 12 years old and under should any of the four active road tires. The OCCUPANT RESTRAINT always ride buckled up in the rear seat of vehicle may need to be driven for up to SYSTEMS a vehicle with a rear seat. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in Some of the most important safety features in order for the TPMS to receive this 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a your vehicle are the restraint systems: information. rear-facing child restraint) must ride in Occupant Restraint Systems the front passenger seat, move the seat as General Information far back as possible and use the proper • Seat Belt Systems The following regulatory statement applies to child restraint. (Refer to “Child Re- straints” in the section for further all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air information). this vehicle: Bags 3. Children that are not big enough to wear This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC • Child Restraints the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to Rules and with Industry Canada license- Some of the safety features described in this “Child Restraints” in this section for fur- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- section may be standard equipment on some ther information) should be secured in the ject to the following two conditions: models, or may be optional equipment on rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- child restraints or belt-positioning booster ference, and rized dealer. seats. Older children who do not use child 89 restraints or belt-positioning booster seats Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System WARNING! should ride properly buckled up in the (BeltAlert) rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

SAFETY 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. senger front air bag can cause death or BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind serious injury to a child 12 years or the driver and outboard front seat passenger 5. You should read the instructions provided younger, including a child in a rear- (if equipped with outboard front passenger with your child restraint to make sure that facing child restraint. seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The you are using it properly. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni- 6. All occupants should always wear their lap the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi- and shoulder belts properly. tion. Seat Belt Systems 7. The driver and front passenger seats Initial Indication should be moved back as far as practical Buckle up even though you are an excellent If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition to allow the front air bags room to inflate. driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If collision that includes you. This can happen tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy- far away from home or on your own street. the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate equipped with outboard front passenger seat forcefully into the space between occu- Research has shown that seat belts save BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition pants and the door and occupants could lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- be injured. injuries in a collision. Some of the worst tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on injuries happen when people are thrown from 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs and remain on until both outboard front seat the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility to be modified to accommodate a dis- belts are buckled. The outboard front passen- of ejection and the risk of injury caused by abled person, refer to “Customer Assis- ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out- striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in tance” for customer service contact board front passenger seat is unoccupied. a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. information. 90 BeltAlert Warning Sequence Change of Status NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated If the driver or outboard front seat passenger driver or outboard front seat passenger (if when the vehicle is moving above a specified (if equipped with outboard front passenger equipped with outboard front passenger seat vehicle speed range and the driver or out- seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re- board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning minder Light will turn on and remain on until equipped with outboard front passenger seat sequence will begin until the seat belts are the driver and outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat buckled again. seat belts are buckled. BeltAlert is not active when the outboard The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert front passenger seat is unoccupied). The Lap/Shoulder Belts is not active when the outboard front passen- BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be All seating positions in your vehicle are the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding triggered when an animal or other items are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert placed on the outboard front passenger seat The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only warning sequence has completed, the Seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It during very sudden stops or collisions. This Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the is recommended that pets be restrained in feature allows the shoulder part of the seat seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or belt to move freely with you under normal sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, conditions. However, in a collision the seat until the driver and occupied outboard front and cargo is properly stowed. belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out driver should instruct all occupants to buckle BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by of the vehicle. their seat belts. an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

91 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a • Relying on the air bags alone could lead • A lap belt worn too high can increase the seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc- to more severe injuries in a collision. The risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt SAFETY cupants, including the driver, should al- air bags work with your seat belt to forces won’t be at the strong hip and ways wear their seat belts whether or not restrain you properly. In some collisions, pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. an air bag is also provided at their seat- the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always Always wear the lap part of your seat belt ing position to minimize the risk of se- wear your seat belt even though you have as low as possible and keep it snug. vere injury or death in the event of a air bags. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you • In a collision, you and your passengers crash. properly. In a collision, it could even cut • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could can suffer much greater injuries if you into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat make your injuries in a collision much are not properly buckled up. You can against your body, without twists. If you worse. You might suffer internal injuries, strike the interior of your vehicle or other can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve- or you could even slide out of the seat passengers, or you can be thrown out of hicle, take it to an authorized dealer belt. Follow these instructions to wear the vehicle. Always be sure you and immediately and have it fixed. your seat belt safely and to keep your others in your vehicle are buckled up • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong passengers safe, too. properly. buckle will not protect you properly. The • Two people should never be belted into a • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, lap portion could ride too high on your single seat belt. People belted together inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- body, possibly causing internal injuries. can crash into one another in a collision, sion, people riding in these areas are Always buckle your seat belt into the hurting one another badly. Never use a more likely to be seriously injured or buckle nearest you. lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more killed. • A seat belt that is too loose will not • Do not allow people to ride in any area of than one person, no matter what their protect you properly. In a sudden stop, your vehicle that is not equipped with size. you could move too far forward, increas- seats and seat belts. ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

92 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions WARNING! 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the back and adjust the seat. inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli- 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back sion, increasing head and neck injury. A of the front seat, and next to your arm in seat belt worn under the arm can cause the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up your shoulder so that your strongest the webbing as far as necessary to allow bones will take the force in a collision. the seat belt to go around your lap. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear Pulling Out The Latch Plate your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 1 — Seat Belt Buckle • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart 2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, loose parts. Damaged parts must be reinsert the latch plate into the buckle until placed immediately. Do not disassemble you hear a “click.” or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

93 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and 1. Position the latch plate as close as pos- lies low across your hips, below your ab- sible to the anchor point. domen. To remove slack in the lap belt 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

SAFETY above the latch plate, grasp and twist the loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under fold that begins immediately above the the seat belt in a collision. latch plate. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any folded webbing. The folded webbing must slack so that it is comfortable and not enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. resting on your neck. The retractor will 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. clears the folded webbing and the seat 6. To release the seat belt, push the red belt is no longer twisted. Adjustable Upper Anchorage button on the buckle. The seat belt will Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage automatically retract to its stowed posi- As a guide, if you are shorter than average, tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate In the driver and front passenger seats, the you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in down the webbing to allow the seat belt to top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted a lower position, and if you are taller than retract fully. upward or downward to position the seat belt average, you will prefer the shoulder belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage in a higher position. After you anchorage button to release the anchorage, release the anchorage button, try to move it Use the following procedure to untwist a and move it up or down to the position that up or down to make sure that it is locked in twisted lap/shoulder belt. serves you best. position.

94 NOTE: Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- The front seat belt system is equipped with age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This pretensioning devices that are designed to feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to remove slack from the seat belt in the event be adjusted in the upward position without of a collision. These devices may improve the pushing or squeezing the release button. To performance of the seat belt by removing verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, slack from the seat belt early in a collision. pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor- Pretensioners work for all size occupants, age until it is locked into position. including those in child restraints. WARNING! NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could seat belt placement by the occupant. The make your injuries in a collision much Pregnant Women And Seat Belts seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi- worse. You might suffer internal injuries, tioned properly. Seat belts must be worn by all occupants or you could even slide out of the seat including pregnant women: the risk of injury The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu- belt. Follow these instructions to wear in the event of an accident is reduced for the pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air your seat belt safely and to keep your mother and the unborn child if they are wear- bags, the pretensioners are single use items. passengers safe, too. ing a seat belt. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag • Position the shoulder belt across the must be replaced immediately. shoulder and chest with minimal, if any Position the lap belt snug and low below the slack so that it is comfortable and not abdomen and across the strong bones of the resting on your neck. The retractor will hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. and away from the neck. Never place the • Misadjustment of the seat belt could shoulder belt behind the back or under the reduce the effectiveness of the safety arm. belt in a crash.

95 Energy Management Feature webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the The front seat belt system is equipped with latch plate into the buckle until you hear a an Energy Management feature that may help "click.”

SAFETY further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder retractor assembly that is designed to release belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat webbing in a controlled manner. belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in (ALR) a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- should always be properly restrained in a tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- vehicle with a rear seat. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For addi- ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking WARNING! tional information, refer to “Installing Child Retractor Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un- • Never place a rear-facing child restraint If the passenger seating position is equipped der the “Child Restraints” section of this in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- with an ALR and is being used for normal manual. The figure below illustrates the lock- senger front air bag can cause death or usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far ing feature for each seating position. serious injury to a child 12 years or enough to comfortably wrap around the occu- younger, including a child in a rear- pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the facing child restraint. ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of

96 How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Air Bag System Components WARNING! 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly belt. could increase the risk of injury in colli- • Air Bag Warning Light 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- sions. • Steering Wheel and Column ward until the entire seat belt is extracted. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing • Instrument Panel 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat the seat belt or children who are using • Knee Impact Bolsters belt retracts, you will hear a clicking booster seats. The locked mode is only • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags sound. This indicates the seat belt is now used to install rear-facing or forward- in the Automatic Locking Mode. facing child restraints that have a har- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode ness for restraining the child. • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Supplemental Knee Air Bags Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) and allow it to retract completely to disen- • Front and Side Impact Sensors Some of the safety features described in this gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti- • Seat Belt Pretensioners vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- section may be standard equipment on some • Seat Track Position Sensors ing mode. models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- Air Bag Warning Light rized dealer. WARNING! The ORC monitors the readiness of the The air bag system must be ready to protect • The seat belt assembly must be replaced electronic parts of the air bag system when- you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint if the switchable Automatic Locking Re- ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir- or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition belt function is not working properly cuits and interconnecting wiring associated switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the when checked according to the proce- with the electrical Air Bag System Compo- air bag system is not on and the air bags will dures in the Service Manual. nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the not inflate. following Air Bag System Components: 97 The ORC contains a backup power supply • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come system that may deploy the air bag system on during the four to eight seconds when WARNING! even if the battery loses power or it becomes the ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ an authorized dealer service the air bag disconnected prior to deployment. ON/RUN position. system immediately. SAFETY The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after Redundant Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately the four to eight-second interval. four to eight seconds for a self-check when • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter- If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/ mittently or remains on while driving. detected, which could affect the Supplemen- RUN position. After the self-check, the Air NOTE: tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en- Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the detects a malfunction in any part of the gine related gauges are not working, the Oc- instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also Warning Light will stay on until the fault is either momentarily or continuously. A single be disabled. In this condition the air bags cleared. In addition, a single chime will chime will sound to alert you if the light may not be ready to inflate for your protec- sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag comes on again after initial startup. tion. Have an authorized dealer service the Warning Light has come on and a fault has The ORC also includes diagnostics that will air bag system immediately. been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag remains on while driving have an authorized Warning Light if a malfunction is detected WARNING! dealer service the vehicle immediately. that could affect the air bag system. The Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your For additional information regarding the Re- diagnostics also record the nature of the instrument panel could mean you won’t dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get- malfunction. While the air bag system is have the air bag system to protect you in a ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section designed to be maintenance free, if any of collision. If the light does not come on as a the following occurs, have an authorized bulb check when the ignition is first of this manual. dealer service the air bag system immedi- turned on, stays on after you start the ately. vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have

98 Front Air Bags WARNING! This vehicle has front air bags and lap/ shoulder belts for both the driver and front • Being too close to the steering wheel or passenger. The front air bags are a supple- instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The including death. Air bags need room to driver front air bag is mounted in the center of inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending the steering wheel. The passenger front air your arms to reach the steering wheel or bag is mounted in the instrument panel, instrument panel. above the glove compartment. The words • Never place a rear-facing child restraint “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- on the air bag covers. senger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster facing child restraint. Locations • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Bags 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/ Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul- 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster tistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. 99 The first stage inflator is triggered immedi- some that may produce substantial vehicle ately during an impact that requires air bag WARNING! damage — for example, some pole collisions, deployment. A low energy output is used in • Do not put anything on or around the air truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. less severe collisions. A higher energy output bag covers or attempt to open them

SAFETY On the other hand, depending on the type is used for more severe collisions. manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air and location of impact, front air bags may This vehicle may be equipped with a driver bags may no longer be functional. The deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end and/or front passenger seat belt buckle protective covers for the air bag cush- damage but that produce a severe initial switch that detects whether the driver or front ions are designed to open only when the deceleration. passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt air bags are inflating. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of • Relying on the air bags alone could lead deceleration over time, vehicle speed and the Advanced Front Air Bags. to more severe injuries in a collision. The damage by themselves are not good indica- air bags work with your seat belt to tors of whether or not an air bag should have This vehicle may be equipped with driver restrain you properly. In some collisions, deployed. and/or front passenger seat track position air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of your seat belts even though you have air Seat belts are necessary for your protection in the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat bags. all collisions, and also are needed to help position. keep you in position, away from an inflating Front Air Bag Operation air bag. WARNING! Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- When the ORC detects a collision requiring • No objects should be placed over or near tional protection by supplementing the seat the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. the air bag on the instrument panel or belts. Front air bags are not expected to A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated steering wheel because any such objects reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or to inflate the front air bags. could cause harm if the vehicle is in a rollover collisions. The front air bags will not The steering wheel hub trim cover and the collision severe enough to cause the air deploy in all frontal collisions, including upper passenger side of the instrument panel bag to inflate. separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air 100 bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to Supplemental Side Air Bags blink your eyes. The front air bags then Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags quickly deflate while helping to restrain the (SABs) driver and front passenger. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Impact Bolsters Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the position the front occupants for improved front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS interaction with the front air bags. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. WARNING! The SABs may help to reduce the risk of • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee occupant injury during certain side impacts, impact bolsters in any way. in addition to the injury reduction potential Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side • Do not mount any accessories to the provided by the seat belts and body structure. Air Bag knee impact bolsters such as alarm When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. the outboard side of the seatback’s trim Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occu- This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru- high speed and with such a high force that it ment panel below the steering column. The could injure occupants if they are not seated Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides properly, or if items are positioned in the area enhanced protection during a frontal impact where the SAB inflates. Children are at an by working together with the seat belts, pre- even greater risk of injury from a deploying air tensioners, and front air bags. bag. 101 are not belted and seated properly, or if items WARNING! are positioned in the area where the SABICs Do not use accessory seat covers or place inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of objects between you and the Side Air injury from a deploying air bag. SAFETY Bags; the performance could be adversely The SABICs may help reduce the risk of affected and/or objects could be pushed partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- into you, causing serious injury. pants through side windows in certain side Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains impact events. (SABICs) WARNING! This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). • Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- block the deployment of the SABICs. tains (SABICs) are located above the side Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable The trim covering above the side win- windows. The trim covering the SABICs is Curtain (SABIC) Label Location dows where the SABIC and its deploy- labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and ment path are located should remain other injuries to front and rear seat outboard free from any obstructions. occupants in certain side impacts, in addi- • In order for the SABICs to work as in- tion to the injury reduction potential provided tended, do not install any accessory by the seat belts and body structure. items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket The SABIC deploys downward, covering the sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the racks that require permanent attach- outside edge of the headliner out of the way ments (bolts or screws) for installation and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they 102 not impact the area of the passenger com- WARNING! partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy WARNING! on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the during angled or offset frontal collisions the seats. Children must be properly roof of the vehicle for any reason. where the front air bags deploy. restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat child. belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint WARNING! Controller (ORC) determines whether the de- WARNING! ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit impact event is appropriate, based on the • Occupants, including children, who are upright in the center of the seat. severity and type of collision. The side impact up against or very close to Side Air Bags • Being too close to the Side Air Bags sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap- can be seriously injured or killed. Occu- during deployment could cause you to propriate response to impact events. The sys- pants, including children, should never be severely injured or killed. tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags lean on or sleep against the door, side on the impact side of the vehicle during • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could windows, or area where the side air bags lead to more severe injuries in a colli- impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant inflate, even if they are in an infant or protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags sion. The Side Air Bags work with your child restraint. seat belt to restrain you properly. In deploy independently; a left side impact de- • Seat belts (and child restraints where some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right- appropriate) are necessary for your pro- deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags tection in all collisions. They also help even though you have Side Air Bags. only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good keep you in position, away from an in- indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags flating Side Air Bag. To get the best NOTE: should have deployed. protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Air bag covers may not be obvious in the pants must wear their seat belts properly The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side interior trim, but they will open during air bag and sit upright with their backs against collisions, including some collisions at cer- deployment. tain angles, or some side collisions that do 103 Rollover Events Air Bag System Components NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in Side Air Bags are designed to activate in NOTE: all collisions. This does not mean something certain rollover events. The ORC determines The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is wrong with the air bag system. SAFETY whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags monitors the internal circuits and intercon- in a particular rollover event is appropriate, necting wiring associated with electrical Air If you do have a collision which deploys the based on the severity and type of collision. Bag System Components listed below: air bags, any or all of the following may occur: Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • The air bag material may sometimes cause cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc- • Air Bag Warning Light have deployed. cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all • Steering Wheel and Column The abrasions are similar to friction rope rollover events. The rollover sensing system • Instrument Panel burns or those you might get sliding along a determines if a rollover event may be in carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not • Knee Impact Bolsters progress and whether deployment is appro- caused by contact with chemicals. They are priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags not permanent and normally heal quickly. rollover or near rollover event, and deploy- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch However, if you haven’t healed significantly ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the within a few days, or if you have any blis- • Supplemental Side Air Bags rollover sensing system will also deploy the tering, see your doctor immediately. seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the • Supplemental Knee Air Bags • As the air bags deflate, you may see some vehicle. • Front and Side Impact Sensors smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that gen- The SABICs may help reduce the risk of • Seat Belt Pretensioners erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- • Seat Track Position Sensors inflation. These airborne particles may irri- pants through side windows in certain roll- tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you If A Deployment Occurs over or side impact events. have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area The front air bags are designed to deflate with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, immediately after deployment. move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, 104 see your doctor. If these particles settle on Enhanced Accident Response System • Cut off battery power to the: your clothing, follow the garment manufac- – Engine In the event of an impact, if the communica- turer’s instructions for cleaning. – Electric Motor (if equipped) tion network remains intact, and the power – Electric power steering Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags remains intact, depending on the nature of have deployed. If you are involved in another the event, the ORC will determine whether to – Brake booster collision, the air bags will not be in place to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- – Electric park brake protect you. tem perform the following functions: – Automatic transmission gear selector – Horn • Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) WARNING! – Front wiper • Cut off battery power to the electric motor – Headlamp washer pump Deployed air bags and seat belt preten- (If Equipped) sioners cannot protect you in another col- • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery NOTE: lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten- has power After an accident, remember to cycle the sioners, and the seat belt retractor ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on assemblies replaced by an authorized and remove the key from the ignition switch as long as the battery has power or for 15 dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu- to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check minutes from the intervention of the En- pant Restraint Controller System serviced the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com- as well. hanced Accident Response System. partment and on the ground near the engine • Unlock the power door locks. NOTE: compartment and fuel tank before resetting Your vehicle may also be designed to perform the system and starting the engine. If there • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the any of these other functions in response to are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle interior trim, but they will open during air the Enhanced Accident Response System: electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an bag deployment. • Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the accident, reset the system by following the • After any collision, the vehicle should be HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu- procedure described below. taken to an authorized dealer immediately. lation Door

105 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Customer Action Customer Will See Customer Action Customer Will See Procedure NOTE: NOTE: After the event occurs, when the system is Each step MUST BE held for at least two Each step MUST BE held for at least two

SAFETY active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is seconds seconds displayed. Turn the ignition switch from igni- 1. Turn ignition Right turn light is ON tion AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ig- STOP/OFF/LOCK. 7. Turn right turn SOLID. (Turn Signal Switch signal switch ON. Left turn light nition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the Must be placed in BLINKS. vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart- Neutral State). Right turn light is ment and on the ground near the engine Right turn light 8. Place turn signal OFF. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ compartment and fuel tank before resetting BLINKS. in neutral state. Left turn light ACC/ON/RUN. the system and starting the engine. Left turn light is OFF. BLINKS. Right turn light is ON Right turn light is ON Depending on the nature of the event the left 3. Turn right turn SOLID. 9. Turn left turn sig- SOLID. and right turn signal lights, located in the signal switch ON. Left turn light nal switch ON. Left turn light is ON instrument panel, may both be blinking and BLINKS. SOLID. will continue to blink. In order to move your Right turn light is 10. Turn left turn vehicle to the side of the road, you must 4. Place turn signal OFF. signal switch OFF. Right turn light is follow the system reset procedure. in neutral state. Left turn light (Turn Signal Switch OFF. BLINKS. Must be placed in Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light Neutral State). 5. Turn left turn sig- BLINKS. 11. Turn ignition nal switch ON. Left turn light is ON STOP/OFF/LOCK. SOLID. Right turn light 6. Place turn signal BLINKS. in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF.

106 Customer Action Customer Will See WARNING! WARNING! NOTE: Do not modify the components or wiring, bag system for persons with disabilities, Each step MUST BE held for at least two including adding any kind of badges or contact an authorized dealer. seconds stickers to the steering wheel hub trim 12. Turn ignition cover or the upper right side of the in- Event Data Recorder (EDR) MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. strument panel. Do not modify the front (Entire sequence This vehicle is equipped with an event data System is now reset needs to be com- bumper, vehicle body structure, or add and the engine may recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR pleted within one aftermarket side steps or running be started. is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like minute or sequence boards. will need to be re- • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of situations, such as an air bag deployment or peated). the air bag system yourself. Be sure to hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in Turn hazard flashers tell anyone who works on your vehicle understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- OFF (Manually). that it has an air bag system. formed. The EDR is designed to record data • Do not attempt to modify any part of your related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- If a reset procedure step is not completed air bag system. The air bag may inflate tems for a short period of time, typically within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights accidentally or may not function prop- 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is will blink and the reset procedure must be erly if modifications are made. Take your designed to record such data as: performed again in order to be successful. vehicle to an authorized dealer for any • How various systems in your vehicle were air bag system service. If your seat, in- Maintaining Your Air Bag System operating; cluding your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ- • Whether or not the driver and passenger WARNING! ing removal or loosening/tightening of safety belts were buckled/fastened; • Modifications to any part of the air bag seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing system could cause it to fail when you to your authorized dealer. Only manufac- the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, turer approved seat accessories may be need it. You could be injured if the air • How fast the vehicle was traveling. bag system is not there to protect you. used. If it is necessary to modify the air

107 These data can help provide a better under- Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of re- standing of the circumstances in which straints for children from newborn size to the crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled child almost large enough for an adult safety up at all times, including babies and chil- belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

SAFETY NOTE: dren. Every state in the United States, and Manual to make sure you have the correct EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if every Canadian province, requires that small seat for your child. Carefully read and follow a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data children ride in proper restraint systems. This all the instructions and warnings in the child are recorded by the EDR under normal driving is the law, and you can be prosecuted for restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, ignoring it. bels attached to the child restraint. gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law Children 12 years or younger should ride Before buying any restraint system, make enforcement, could combine the EDR data properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail- sure that it has a label certifying that it meets with the type of personally identifying data able. According to crash statistics, children all applicable Safety Standards. You should routinely acquired during a crash investiga- are safer when properly restrained in the rear also make sure that you can install it in the tion. seats rather than in the front. vehicle where you will use it. To read data recorded by an EDR, special NOTE: WARNING! equipment is required, and access to the • For additional information, refer to vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to In a collision, an unrestrained child can www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such become a projectile inside the vehicle. 1-888-327-4236. as law enforcement, that have the special The force required to hold even an infant • Canadian residents should refer to Transport equipment, can read the information if they on your lap could become so great that you have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Canada’s website for additional information: could not hold the child, no matter how http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ strong you are. The child and others could safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm. be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

108 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight lim- Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of its of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- Small Children have out-grown the height or weight limit of point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat their rear-facing child restraint of the vehicle Children who have out-grown their forward- Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children facing child restraint, but are too small to prop- seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or WARNING! Safety experts recommend that children ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two • Never place a rear-facing child restraint child seats often have a higher weight limit in years old or until they reach either the height in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- the rear-facing direction than infant carriers senger front air bag can cause death or or weight limit of their rear-facing child re- do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil- serious injury to a child 12 years or straint. Two types of child restraints can be dren who have outgrown their infant carrier younger, including a child in a rear- used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert- but are still less than at least two years old. facing child restraint. ible child seats. Children should remain rear-facing until they • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in reach the highest weight or height allowed by the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. the vehicle. It is recommended for children their convertible child seat. from birth until they reach the weight or 109 Older Children And Child Restraints Children Too Large For Booster Seats WARNING! Children who are two years old or who have Children who are large enough to wear the outgrown their rear-facing convertible child • Improper installation can lead to failure shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are of an infant or child restraint. It could SAFETY seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. long enough to bend over the front of the seat come loose in a collision. The child Forward-facing child seats and convertible when their back is against the seatback, could be badly injured or killed. Follow child seats used in the forward-facing direc- should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use the child restraint manufacturer’s direction are for children who are over two years this simple 5-step test to decide whether the tions exactly when installing an infant or old or who have outgrown the rear-facing child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: child restraint. weight or height limit of their rear-facing • After a child restraint is installed in the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against convertible child seat. Children should re- vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat the back of the vehicle seat? main in a forward-facing child seat with a forward or rearward because it can 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably harness for as long as possible, up to the loosen the child restraint attachments. over the front of the vehicle seat – while highest weight or height allowed by the child Remove the child restraint before ad- the child is still sitting all the way back? seat. justing the vehicle seat position. When 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s All children whose weight or height is above the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re- shoulder between their neck and arm? install the child restraint. the forward-facing limit for the child seat • When your child restraint is not in use, 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as should use a belt-positioning booster seat secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt possible, touching the child’s thighs and until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from not the stomach? the child cannot sit with knees bent over the the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it whole trip? is against the seatback, they should use a could strike the occupants or seatbacks belt-positioning booster seat. The child and and cause serious personal injury. If the answer to any of these questions was belt-positioning booster seat are held in the “no,” then the child still needs to use a vehicle by the seat belt. booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt 110 buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If WARNING! WARNING! the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt injury or death. A child must always wear move the child closer to the center of the under an arm or behind their back. In a both the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a seat belt correctly. seat belt on the child correctly. child properly, which may result in serious

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Child Re- Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) XX straint Rear-Facing Child Re- More than 65 lbs X straint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

111 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child re- LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re- (LATCH) Restraint System straint anchorage system called LATCH, straints In This Vehicle which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three SAFETY vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for LATCH Positions LATCH Label more information. Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An- chorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

112 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the What is the weight limit (child’s weight + combined weight of the child and the child weight of the child restraint) for using the restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH anchorage system to attach the child and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system restraint? once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear- Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt facing or forward-facing child restraint. be used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center posi- Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a No tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? child seat in the center seating position. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position Can two child restraints be attached using a does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor- No common lower LATCH anchorage? ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the passenger seat if the child restraint manufac- Yes back of the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? No

113 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind

SAFETY found at the rear of the seat cushion where it each rear seating position located on the Center Seat LATCH : meets the seatback, below the anchorage back of the seat. symbols on the seatback. They are just visible WARNING! when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you • Do not install a child restraint in the run your finger along the gap between the center position using the LATCH system. seatback and seat cushion. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Tether Anchors Please refer to “To Install A LATCH- Compatible Child Restraint” for typical LATCH-compatible child restraint systems installation instructions. will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or Lower Anchors connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether

114 Always follow the directions of the child re- rear-most position to make room for the How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR straint manufacturer when installing your child child seat. You may also move the front (ALR) Seat Belt: restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be seat forward to allow more room for the When using the LATCH attaching system to installed as described here. child seat. install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of belts that are not being used by other occu- the child restraint to the lower anchorages straint pants or being used to secure child restraints. in the selected seating position. An unused belt could injure a child if they If the selected seating position has a Switch- 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat connect it to the top tether anchorage. retractor. Before installing a child restraint belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc- See the section “Installing Child Re- using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt tions below. See the section “Installing Child straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” behind the child restraint and out of the Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to for directions to attach a tether anchor. child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter- check what type of seat belt each seating 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the feres with the child restraint installation, in- position has. child restraint rearward and downward stead of buckling it behind the child re- 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps into the seat. Remove slack in the straps straint, route the seat belt through the child and on the tether strap of the child seat so according to the child restraint manufac- restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not that you can more easily attach the hooks turer’s instructions. lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. 2. Place the child seat between the lower tightly by pulling back and forth on the anchorages for that seating position. For child seat at the belt path. It should not some second row seats, you may need to move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any WARNING! direction. recline the seat and / or raise the head • Improper installation of a child restraint restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat to the LATCH anchorages can lead to can be moved forward and rearward in the failure of the restraint. The child could vehicle, you may wish to move it to its be badly injured or killed. Follow the

115 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing WARNING! WARNING! Child Restraints In This Vehicle child restraint manufacturer’s directions • Follow the child restraint manufactur- exactly when installing an infant or child er’s directions exactly when installing an

SAFETY restraint. infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un- tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- der no circumstances are they to be used matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de- for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt attaching other items or equipment to tight around the child restraint so that it is the vehicle. not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve- mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the hicle Seat Belt retractor and then letting the webbing retract Child restraint systems are designed to be back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the will make a clicking noise while the webbing lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) “Automatic Locking Mode” description in Locations “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors WARNING! ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” Retractor • Improper installation or failure to prop- for additional information on ALR. Top Tether Anchorage Symbol erly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could Please see the table below and the following be badly injured or killed. sections for more information.

116 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Always use the tether anchor when using the weight of the child restraint) for using the seat belt to install a forward facing child re- Weight limit of the Child Restraint Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint, up to the recommended weight limit of forward facing child restraint? the child restraint.. Contact between the front passenger seat and Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child re- back of the front passenger seat? straint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi- seat belt against the belt path of the child re- No tion with an ALR retractor. straint?

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- WARNING! WARNING! able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Child restraint systems are designed to be • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to directions exactly when installing an in- secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap failure of the restraint. The child could fant or child restraint. belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. be badly injured or killed.

117 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top seating position. For some second row If it is locked, you should not be able to Tether Anchorage: seats, you may need to recline the seat pull out any webbing. If the retractor is and/or raise the head restraint to get a not locked, repeat step 5. WARNING! SAFETY better fit. If the rear seat can be moved 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to forward and rearward in the vehicle, you Do not attach a tether strap for a rear- tighten the lap portion around the child facing car seat to any location in front of may wish to move it to its rear-most posi- restraint while you push the child restraint tion to make room for the child seat. You the car seat, including the seat frame or a rearward and downward into the vehicle tether anchorage. Only attach the tether may also move the front seat forward to seat. strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether allow more room for the child seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap anchorage that is approved for that seating 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from position, located behind the top of the and the seating position has a top tether the retractor to pass it through the belt vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An- anchorage, connect the tether strap to the path of the child restraint. Do not twist the chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) anchorage and tighten the tether strap. belt webbing in the belt path. Restraint System” for the location of ap- See the section “Installing Child Re- proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” you hear a “click.” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap 9. Test that the child restraint is installed portion tight against the child seat. tightly by pulling back and forth on the 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the child seat at the belt path. It should not shoulder part of the belt until you have move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the direction. retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the web- Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so bing retracts, you will hear a clicking check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if sound. This means the seat belt is now in necessary. the Automatic Locking mode. 118 1. Look behind the seating position where Transporting Pets you plan to install the child restraint to Air Bags deploying in the front seat could find the tether anchorage. You may need harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be to move the seat forward to provide better thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a access to the tether anchorage. If there is passenger during panic braking or in a colli- no top tether anchorage for that seating sion. position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in available. pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most by seat belts. direct path for the strap between the an- Rear Seat Tether Anchors chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is SAFETY TIPS equipped with adjustable rear head re- WARNING! straints, raise the head restraint, and Transporting Passengers where possible, route the tether strap un- • An incorrectly anchored tether strap der the head restraint and between the could lead to increased head motion and NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE two posts. If not possible, lower the head possible injury to the child. Use only the CARGO AREA. restraint and pass the tether strap around anchorage position directly behind the the outboard side of the head restraint. child seat to secure a child restraint top WARNING! tether strap. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child • If your vehicle is equipped with a split • Do not leave children or animals inside restraint to the top tether anchorage as rear seat, make sure the tether strap parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior shown in the diagram. does not slip into the opening between heat build-up may cause serious injury 4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord- the seatbacks as you remove slack in the or death. strap. ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a instructions. cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.

119 addition, inspect the exhaust system each WARNING! WARNING! time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil In a collision, people riding in these • If you are required to drive with the change. Replace as required. areas are more likely to be seriously trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make

SAFETY injured or killed. sure that all windows are closed and the Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside • Do not allow people to ride in any area of climate control BLOWER switch is set at The Vehicle your vehicle that is not equipped with high speed. DO NOT use the recircula- seats and seat belts. tion mode. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a • If it is necessary to sit in a parked Seat Belts seat and using a seat belt properly. vehicle with the engine running, adjust Inspect the seat belt system periodically, your heating or cooling controls to force checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. outside air into the vehicle. Set the Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Exhaust Gas blower at high speed. ately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. WARNING! The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con- maintained engine exhaust system. after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col- must be replaced after a collision if they have Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of orless and odorless. Breathing it can make been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- you unconscious and can eventually poi- the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow be detected inside the vehicle, or when the seat belt or retractor condition, replace the these safety tips: underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, seat belt. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or in confined areas any longer than plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar- Air Bag Warning Light needed to move your vehicle in or out of eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or The Air Bag warning light will turn on for the area. mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose four to eight seconds as a bulb check when connections could permit exhaust fumes to the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. seep into the passenger compartment. In If the light is either not on during starting, 120 stays on, or turns on while driving, have the mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position system inspected at your authorized dealer as and interfere with the accelerator, brake or WARNING! soon as possible. After the bulb check, this clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your that cannot be properly attached and light will illuminate with a single chime when vehicle in other ways. secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat a fault with the Air Bag System has been needs to be replaced, only use a FCA detected. It will stay on until the fault is WARNING! approved floor mat for the specific removed. If the light comes on intermittently make, model, and year of your vehicle. • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on or remains on while driving, have your autho- An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the driver’s side floor area. To check for rized dealer service the vehicle immediately. fasteners may cause your floor mat to in- interference, with the vehicle properly Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in terfere with the accelerator, brake, or parked with the engine off, fully depress “Safety” for further information. clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle the accelerator, the brake, and the control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or clutch pedal (if present) to check for Defroster DEATH: interference. If your floor mat interferes Check operation by selecting the defrost • ALWAYS securely attach your floor with the operation of any pedal, or is not mode and place the blower control on high mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO secure to the floor, remove the floor mat NOT install your floor mat upside down speed. You should be able to feel the air from the vehicle and place the floor mat or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to in your trunk. directed against the windshield. See your confirm mat is secured using the floor • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat authorized dealer for service if your defroster mat fasteners on a regular basis. on the passenger’s side floor area. is inoperable. • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or Floor Mat Safety Information FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE slide into the driver’s side floor area before installing any other floor mat. when the vehicle is moving. Objects can Always use floor mats designed to fit your NEVER install or stack an additional become trapped under accelerator, vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. brake, or clutch pedals and could cause interfere with the operation of the accelera- • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit a loss of vehicle control. tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat mat that is securely attached using the floor 121 Lights WARNING! WARNING! • NEVER place any objects under the floor has been properly installed and is se- Have someone observe the operation of brake mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob- cured to your vehicle using the floor mat lights and exterior lights while you work the

SAFETY jects could change the position of the fasteners by lightly pulling mat. controls. Check turn signal and high beam floor mat and may cause interference indicator lights on the instrument panel. with the accelerator, brake, or clutch Door Latches pedals. Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Make • If the vehicle carpet has been removed Outside The Vehicle Check for proper closing, latching, and lock- and re-installed, always properly attach ing. carpet to the floor and check the floor Tires mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and carpet. Fully depress each pedal to uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, Check area under the vehicle after overnight check for interference with the accelera- nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re- leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or install the floor mats. tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The • It is recommended to only use mild soap and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cause should be located and corrected imme- and water to clean your floor mats. After cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for diately. cleaning, always check your floor mat tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

122 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 124 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 143 Stopping The Engine ...... 124 System ...... 137 LaneSense Warning Message ...... 143 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDA- SPEEDCONTROL...... 137 Changing LaneSense Status...... 145 TIONS...... 125 Activation ...... 138 REARBACKUPCAMERA...... 145 Setting A Desired Speed ...... 138 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . .125 FOURWHEELDRIVE...... 147 Varying The Speed ...... 138 Auto Park Brake ...... 127 Four Wheel Drive (4x4)...... 147 SafeHold ...... 127 Accelerating For Passing...... 139 SELEC-TERRAIN ...... 148 Brake Service Mode...... 127 Resume Speed...... 139 Deactivation ...... 139 Mode Selection Guide ...... 149 MANUAL TRANSMISSION...... 128 ADDING FUEL ...... 150 Shifting ...... 129 REARPARKSENSE...... 140 Downshifting ...... 130 Rear ParkSense Sensors ...... 140 TRAILER TOWING ...... 151 NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANS- Enabling And Disabling Rear Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer MISSION...... 131 ParkSense ...... 141 Weight Ratings) ...... 151 Service The Rear ParkSense System. . .141 Gear Selector...... 132 RECREATIONAL TOWING...... 152 ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .141 Gear Ranges ...... 133 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Transmission Limp Home Mode .....136 LANESENSE ...... 142 Vehicle ...... 152 Ignition Park Interlock ...... 137 LaneSense Operation ...... 142 Recreational Towing...... 152

123 STARTING THE ENGINE Manual Transmission 4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10- Proceed as follows: Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, 15 seconds before attempting to restart adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the engine. your seat belt, and if present, instruct all the gear selector in the NEUTRAL other occupants to buckle their seat belts. position. Stopping The Engine To shut off the engine with vehicle speed WARNING! 2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing the accelerator. greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or push the START/ • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, 3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and STOP button three times consecutively or with access to an unlocked vehicle. release it as soon as the engine is started. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- within a few seconds. The engine will shut attended is dangerous for a number of 4. If the engine does not start, place the down, and the ignition will be placed in the reasons. A child or others could be seri- ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10- RUN position. ously or fatally injured. Children should 15 seconds before attempting to restart STARTING AND OPERATING Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from be warned not to touch the parking the engine. the RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Automatic Transmission • Do not leave the key fob in or near the supply to the accessories are maintained for a vehicle (or in a location accessible to Proceed as follows: period of three minutes. children), and do not leave the ignition 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put Opening the driver side door with the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could the gear selector in the PARK or NEU- in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds operate power windows, other controls, TRAL position. the driver to place the ignition to OFF. or move the vehicle. 2. Press on the brake pedal, without press- When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the Start the engine with the gear selector in the ing the accelerator. window switches remains active for three NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this 3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and before shifting to any driving range. function. release it as soon as the engine is started.

124 After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the recommended viscosity and quality the temperature inside the engine compart- grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic- ment to cool before shutting off the engine. ing And Maintenance”.

ENGINE BREAK-IN CAUTION!

RECOMMENDATIONS Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight A long break-in period is not required for the Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. NOTE: Drive moderately during the first 300 miles A new engine may consume some oil during (500 km). After the initial 60 miles its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or operation. This should be considered a nor- 90 km/h) are desirable. mal part of the break-in and not interpreted Park Brake Switch as a problem. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration To apply the park brake manually, pull up on within the limits of local traffic laws contrib- the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE lamp in the instrument cluster and an indi- acceleration in low gear can be detrimental (EPB) cator on the switch will illuminate. and should be avoided. Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric To release the park brake manually, the igni- The engine oil installed in the engine at the Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater tion switch must be in RUN. Then put your factory is a high-quality energy conserving convenience. The EPB switch is located in foot on the brake pedal and push the park type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis- the center console. brake switch down momentarily. Once the tent with anticipated climate conditions un- park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE der which vehicle operations will occur. For warning lamp and the switch indicator will extinguish. 125 The park brake can also be automatically • Safehold is a new feature that will auto- released. With the engine running and the matically apply the park brake under cer- WARNING! transmission in gear, release the brake pedal tain conditions. The EPB monitors the sta- attended is dangerous for a number of and depress the throttle pedal. For safety tus of the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door reasons. A child or others could be seri- reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened. and pedal positions to determine if the ously or fatally injured. Children should driver may have exited while the vehicle is be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: still capable of moving and will then auto- brake, brake pedal or the transmission matically apply the park brake to prevent • You may hear a slight whirring sound from gear selector. the vehicle from rolling. the back of the vehicle while the parking • Do not leave the key fob in or near the brake engages or disengages. • The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the vehicle (or in a location accessible to EPB switch is held for longer than 60 sec- children), and do not leave the ignition • If your foot is on the brake pedal while you onds in either the released or applied posi- in the ON or RUN mode. A child could are engaging or disengaging the parking tion. The light will extinguish upon releas- operate power windows, other controls, brake, you may notice a small amount of ing the switch. or move the vehicle. brake pedal movement. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- STARTING AND OPERATING • Refer to “Electric Park Brake (EPB)” in gaged before driving; failure to do so can • The new Auto Park Brake feature can be “Starting And Operating” located in the lead to brake failure and a collision. used to apply the park brake automatically vehicle’s Owner's Manual for further • Always fully apply the parking brake every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park details. Brake can be enabled and disabled in the when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll Settings menu in Uconnect or in “Safe and cause damage or injury. Also be WARNING! certain to leave the transmission in Hold” conditions. • When exiting the vehicle, always remove PARK. Failure to do so may allow the • The parking brake can be engaged even the key fob from the vehicle and lock vehicle to roll and cause damage or when the ignition is OFF, however, it can your vehicle. injury. only be disengaged when the ignition is in • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the RUN mode. or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

126 the gear selector is not firmly locked in Park- For manual transmissions, the EPB will auto- CAUTION! ing position, EPB applies automatically even matically engage if all of the following condi- If the Brake System Warning Light remains if Auto Park Brake has been previously dis- tions are met: on with the parking brake released, a brake abled. • Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). system malfunction is indicated. Have the SafeHold • There is no attempt to depress the brake brake system serviced by an authorized pedal or accelerator pedal. dealer immediately. SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will engage the park brake automati- • The clutch pedal is not pressed. Auto Park Brake cally if the vehicle is left unsecured while the • The seat belt is unbuckled. ignition is in the RUN mode. The EPB can be programmed to be applied • The driver door is open. automatically whenever the vehicle speed is For automatic transmissions, the EPB will SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by automatically engage if all of the following below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door conditions are met: transmission is placed in PARK, or with a is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once manual transmission, whenever the ignition • Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is • There is no attempt to depress the brake again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph enabled and disabled by customer selection pedal or accelerator pedal. (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF through the Customer Programmable Fea- mode and back to RUN again. • The seat belt is unbuckled. tures section of the Uconnect Settings. • The driver door is open. Brake Service Mode Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to • The vehicle is not in the PARK position. We recommend having your brakes serviced the release position while the transmission is by your authorized dealer. You should only placed in PARK (automatic transmission) make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some only enter Brake Service Mode during brake cases, with an automatic transmission, if at service. the cycle of key from RUN to the OFF mode

127 When servicing your rear brakes, it may be NOTE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION necessary for you or your technician to push A dedicated message will appear in the in- the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can- WARNING! the electric park brake system, this can only not be activated. be done after retracting the EPB actuator. You or others could be injured if you leave When brake service work is complete, the The actuator retraction can be done easily by the vehicle unattended without having the following steps must be followed to reset the entering the Brake Service Mode through the parking brake fully applied. The parking parking brake system to normal operation: Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu brake should always be applied when the based system will guide you through the • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in • Press the brake pedal with moderate force. order to perform rear brake service. • Apply the EPB Switch. Service Mode has requirements that must be CAUTION! NOTE: met in order to be activated: Never drive with your foot resting on the A dedicated message will appear in the in- STARTING AND OPERATING clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the ve- • The vehicle must be at a standstill. strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can- hicle on a hill with the clutch pedal par- • The parking brake must be disabled. not be deactivated. tially engaged, as this will cause abnormal • The transmission must be in park or neu- wear on the clutch. tral. WARNING! NOTE: You can be badly injured working on or • The EPB switch not activated. During cold weather, you may experience around a motor vehicle. Do only that ser- • The vehicle in ignition RUN mode. increased effort in shifting until the transmis- vice work for which you have the knowl- • The brake pedal not pressed. edge and the right equipment. If you have sion fluid warms up. This is normal. any doubt about your ability to perform a While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp service job, take your vehicle to a compe- will flash continuously while the ignition is in tent mechanic. the RUN mode.

128 To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to Shifting the floor and put the gear selector to the Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting desired position (the diagram for the engage- gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly ment of the gears is displayed on the handle press the accelerator pedal. of the lever). You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission effi- ciently for fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily REVERSE Ring loaded or pulling a trailer, these recom- To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL mended up-shift speeds may not apply. position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and simultaneously move the lever to the left and then forward. Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 All Engines Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90) Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

129 NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmis- WARNING! CAUTION! sion is normal. This noise can be most notice- Do not downshift for additional engine • Failure to follow the maximum recom- able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL braking on a slippery surface. The drive mended downshifting speeds may cause with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal re- wheels could lose their grip, and the ve- the engine damage and/or damage the leased), but it may also be heard when driv- hicle could skid. clutch, even if the clutch pedal is ing. The noise may also be more noticeable pressed. when the transmission is warm. This noise is • Descending a hill in low range with normal and is not an indication of a problem CAUTION! clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage. with your clutch or transmission. • Skipping gears and downshifting into Downshifting lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds damage the engine and clutch systems, Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear Any attempt to shift into lower gear with is recommended to preserve brakes when clutch pedal depressed may result dam- CAUTION!

STARTING AND OPERATING driving down steep hills. In addition, down- age to the clutch system. Shifting into Failure to follow the maximum recom- shifting at the right time provides better ac- lower gear and releasing the clutch may mended downshifting speeds may cause celeration when you desire to resume speed. result in engine damage. the engine to overspeed and/or damage Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to • When descending a hill, be very careful the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. to downshift one gear at a time to pre- pressed. vent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.

130 Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

selector and move the selector rearward or CAUTION! forward. You must also press the brake pedal WARNING! If you skip a gear while downshifting or to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher these conditions may cause the engine to when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly overspeed if too low of a gear is selected speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle and the clutch pedal is released. Damage Interlock System" in this section). Select the could accelerate quickly forward or in to the clutch and the transmission can DRIVE range for normal driving. reverse. You could lose control of the result from skipping a gear while down- vehicle and hit someone or something. The electronically-controlled transmission shifting or downshifting at too high of a Only shift into gear when the engine is adapts its shift schedule based on driver vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is idling normally and your foot is firmly held pressed (i.e., not released). inputs, along with environmental and road pressing the brake pedal. conditions. The transmission electronics are • Unintended movement of a vehicle NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts could injure those in or near the vehicle. on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. As with all vehicles, you should never TRANSMISSION This is a normal condition, and precision exit a vehicle while the engine is run- Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the shifts will develop within a few hundred miles ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always art, fuel efficient nine-speed transmission. (kilometers). apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition The transmission gear range (PRND) is dis- OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF played beside the gear selector and in the mode, the transmission is locked in instrument cluster display. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear 131 made using the AutoStick shift control (refer WARNING! CAUTION! to “AutoStick” in this section for further PARK, securing the vehicle against un- Damage to the transmission may occur if information). Toggling the gear selector for- wanted movement. the following precautions are not ob- ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick • When leaving the vehicle, always make served: position (beside the DRIVE position) will sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE manually select the transmission gear, and remove the key fob from the vehicle, and only after the vehicle has come to a will display the current gear in the instrument lock the vehicle. complete stop. cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is NOTE: Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- above idle speed. If the gear selector cannot be moved to the attended is dangerous for a number of • Before shifting into any gear, make sure PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position reasons. A child or others could be seri- your foot is firmly pressing the brake (when pushed forward) it is probably in the ously or fatally injured. Children should pedal. AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE be warned not to touch the parking STARTING AND OPERATING position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis- brake, brake pedal or the transmission NOTE: sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the gear selector. You must press and hold the brake pedal instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to • Do not leave the key fob in or near the while shifting out of PARK. the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for vehicle (or in a location accessible to access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. children), and do not leave the ignition Gear Selector in the ON or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, The transmission gear selector has PARK, or move the vehicle. REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be

132 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before when the accelerator pedal is released and shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your the load on the transmission locking mecha- foot on the brake pedal when shifting be- nism may make it difficult to move the gear tween these gears. selector out of PARK. As an added precau- tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. CAUTION! When exiting the vehicle, always:

After selecting any gear range, wait a mo- • Apply the parking brake. ment to allow the selected gear to engage • Shift the transmission into PARK. before accelerating. This is especially im- • Turn the ignition OFF. portant when the engine is cold. • Remove the key fob from the vehicle. Gear Selector Lock Button Gear Ranges WARNING! The nine-speed transmission has been devel- PARK (P) oped to meet the needs of FCA current and This range supplements the Electric Park • Never use the PARK position as a sub- future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software Brake (EPB) by locking the transmission. The stitute for the park brake. Always apply and calibration is refined to optimize the engine can be started in this range. Never the park brake fully when exiting the customer’s driving experience and fuel attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in vehicle to guard against vehicle move- economy. By design, some vehicle and drive- motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the ment and possible injury or damage. line combinations utilize 9th gear only in very vehicle in this range. • Your vehicle could move and injure you specific driving situations and conditions. and others if it is not in PARK. Check by When parking on a level surface, you may trying to move the transmission gear shift the transmission into PARK first, and selector out of PARK with the brake then apply the EPB. 133 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! pedal released. Make sure the transmis- As with all vehicles, you should never children), and do not leave the ignition sion is in PARK before exiting the ve- exit a vehicle while the engine is running in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child hicle. or the propulsion system is active. Be- could operate power windows, other con- • The transmission may not engage PARK fore exiting a vehicle, always come to a trols, or move the vehicle. if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the complete stop, then apply the park vehicle to a complete stop before shift- brake, shift the transmission into PARK, CAUTION! ing to PARK, and verify that the trans- and turn the ignition OFF. When the mission gear position indicator solidly ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans- • Before moving the transmission gear se- indicates PARK (P) without blinking. En- mission is locked in PARK, securing the lector out of PARK, you must turn the sure that the vehicle is completely vehicle against unwanted movement. ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also stopped, and the PARK position is prop- • When leaving the vehicle, always make press the brake pedal. Otherwise, dam- erly indicated, before exiting the ve- sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, age to the gear selector could result. hicle. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and STARTING AND OPERATING • DO NOT race the engine when shifting • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or lock the vehicle. from PARK or NEUTRAL into another NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, gear range, as this can damage the than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly or with access to an unlocked vehicle. drivetrain. pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- could accelerate quickly forward or in attended is dangerous for a number of The following indicators should be used to reverse. You could lose control of the reasons. A child or others could be seri- ensure that you have properly engaged the vehicle and hit someone or something. ously or fatally injured. Children should transmission into the PARK position: Only shift into gear when the engine is be warned not to touch the park brake, • When shifting into PARK, press the lock idling normally (or stopped) and your brake pedal or the transmission gear foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. selector. button on the gear selector, and firmly • Unintended movement of a vehicle • Do not leave the key fob in or near the move the gear selector all the way forward could injure those in or near the vehicle. vehicle (or in a location accessible to until it stops and is fully seated.

134 • Look at the transmission gear position dis- tend transmission life by reducing excessive play and verify that it indicates the PARK CAUTION! shifting and heat buildup. position (P), and is not blinking. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for If the transmission temperature exceeds nor- • With the brake pedal released, verify that any other reason with the transmission in mal operating limits, the transmission con- the gear selector will not move out of PARK. NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission troller may modify the transmission shift damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex- REVERSE (R) “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A pand the range of torque converter clutch This range is for moving the vehicle back- Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer- engagement. This is done to prevent trans- ward. Shift into REVERSE only after the ve- gency” for further information. mission damage due to overheating. hicle has come to a complete stop. DRIVE (D) If the transmission becomes extremely hot, NEUTRAL (N) the “Transmission Temperature Warning This range should be used for most city and Light” may illuminate and the transmission Use this range when the vehicle is standing highway driving. It provides the smoothest may operate differently until the transmis- for prolonged periods with the engine run- upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel sion cools down. ning. The engine may be started in this range. economy. The transmission automatically up- Apply the electric park brake and shift the shifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE During cold temperatures, transmission op- transmission into PARK if you must exit the position provides optimum driving character- eration may be modified depending on en- vehicle. istics under all normal operating conditions. gine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm When frequent transmission shifting occurs up time of the engine and transmission to WARNING! (such as when operating the vehicle under achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn the torque converter clutch, and shifts into traveling into strong head winds or while off the ignition to coast down a hill. These 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the trans- towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick are unsafe practices that limit your re- mission fluid is warm. Normal operation will shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this sponse to changing traffic or road condi- resume once the transmission temperature section for further information) to select a tions. You might lose control of the vehicle has risen to a suitable level. and have a collision. lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and ex- 135 AutoStick • The transmission will automatically upshift • Transmission shifting will be more notice- when necessary to prevent engine over- able when AutoStick is enabled. AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission speed. feature providing manual shift control, giving • The system may revert to automatic shift you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick • The transmission will automatically down- mode if a fault or overheat condition is allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi- shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine detected. lugging) and will display the current gear. nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear and improve overall vehicle performance. • The transmission will automatically down- selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift This system can also provide you with more shift to first or second gear (depending on in or out of the AutoStick position at any time control during passing, city driving, cold slip- model) when coming to a stop. After a stop, without taking your foot off the accelerator pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer the driver should manually upshift (+) the pedal. towing and many other situations. transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. Operation • You can start out (from a stop) in first or WARNING! second gear. Starting out in second gear

STARTING AND OPERATING When the gear selector is in the AutoStick can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Do not downshift for additional engine position (beside the DRIVE position), it can Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the ve- be moved forward and rearward. This allows select the desired gear after the vehicle is hicle could skid, causing a collision or the driver to manually select the transmission brought to a stop. gear being used. Moving the gear selector personal injury. forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed Transmission Limp Home Mode occur. in the instrument cluster. Transmission function is electronically moni- • The system will ignore attempts to upshift NOTE: tored for abnormal conditions. If a condition at too low of a vehicle speed. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only is detected that could result in transmission shift up or down when the driver moves the • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), ex- is engaged because the transmission will activated. In this mode, the transmission cept as described below. not shift automatically. remains in fourth gear regardless of which 136 forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The problem is no longer detected, the trans- System Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be mission will return to normal operation. illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans- NOTE: mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer Even if the transmission can be reset, we for service without damaging the transmis- holds the transmission gear selector in PARK recommend that you visit your authorized unless the brakes are applied. To shift the sion. dealer at your earliest possible convenience. transmission out of PARK, the ignition must Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equip- In the event of a momentary problem, the be in the RUN mode (engine running or not) ment to determine if the problem could recur. transmission can be reset to regain all for- and the brake pedal must be pressed. ward gears by performing the following steps: If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. The brake pedal must also be pressed before 1. Stop the vehicle. pushing the button on the gear selector to Ignition Park Interlock 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if pos- shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE sible. If not, shift the transmission to Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go: when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. NEUTRAL. This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the Interlock, which requires the transmission to SPEED CONTROL engine turns OFF. be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is When engaged, the Speed Control takes over 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in accelerator operations at speeds greater than 5. Restart the engine. the OFF mode. 25 mph (40 km/h).

137 The Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: WARNING! right side of the steering wheel. • In order to ensure proper operation, the faster than you want. You could lose con- Speed Control System has been designed trol and have an accident. Always leave the to shut down if multiple Speed Control system off when you are not using it. functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can Setting A Desired Speed be reactivated by pushing the Speed Con- trol on/off button and resetting the desired Turn the Speed Control on. vehicle set speed. NOTE: • The Speed Control function will not work in The vehicle should be traveling at a steady 4WD Low Range. speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Activation When the vehicle has reached the desired STARTING AND OPERATING Push the on/off button to activate the Speed speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the release. Release the accelerator and the ve- Speed Control Buttons instrument cluster display will illuminate. To hicle will operate at the selected speed. turn the system off, push the on/off button a 1 — SET (+)/ 4 — SET (-)/ second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will Accel Decel Varying The Speed turn off. The system should be turned off 2 — RES/ 5 — CANC/ when not in use. To Increase Speed Resume Cancel 3 — On/Off When the Speed Control is set, you can in- WARNING! crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button. Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go

138 The driver’s preferred units can be selected To Decrease Speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set through the Uconnect system if equipped. speed will continue to decrease until the When the Speed Control is set, you can de- The speed increment shown is dependant on button is released, then the new set speed crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric will be established. (km/h): The driver’s preferred units can be selected Accelerating For Passing U.S. Speed (mph) through the Uconnect system if equipped. The speed increment shown is dependant on Press the accelerator as you would normally. • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric When the pedal is released, the vehicle will in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each (km/h): return to the set speed. subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. U.S. Speed (mph) Resume Speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result To resume a previously set speed, push the speed will continue to increase until the in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each RES button and release. Resume can be used button is released, then the new set speed subsequent tap of the button results in a at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). will be established. decrease of 1 mph. Deactivation Metric Speed (km/h) • If the button is continually pushed, the set A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result speed will continue to decrease until the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each button is released, then the new set speed slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed subsequent tap of the button results in an will be established. Control without erasing the set speed from increase of 1 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h) memory. • If the button is continually pushed, the set • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result Pushing the on/off button or placing the igni- speed will continue to increase until the in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each tion to OFF erases the set speed from button is released, then the new set speed will be established. subsequent tap of the button results in a memory. decrease of 1 km/h.

139 REAR PARKSENSE Chime Detection Distances The Rear ParkSense system provides visual By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is and audible indications of the distance be- the case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an taken into account only what is the shorter tween the rear fascia and a detected obstacle acoustic signal that varies with the distance distance. of the obstacle from the bumper is activated. when backing up, e.g. during a parking ma- Instrument Cluster Display neuver. The frequency of the acoustic signal: Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instru- Rear ParkSense will retain the last system • Increases with the distance between ve- ment cluster only if you have selected "Sound state (enabled or disabled) from the last hicle and object decreases. and Display" within the "Safety And Driving ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to • Becomes continuous when the distance Assistance" menu of the Uconnect system. the RUN position. that separates the vehicle from the obstacle If an obstacle is detected in the center rear Rear ParkSense can be active only when the is less than approximately 12 inches region, the display will show a single solid arc gear selector is in REVERSE. (30 cm), while terminates immediately if in the center rear region and will produce a

STARTING AND OPERATING the distance to the obstacle increases. one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves Rear ParkSense Sensors • Remains constant if the distance between closer to the obstacle, the display will show The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If the single arc moving closer to the vehicle the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area be- this situation occurs for the side sensors, and the sound tone will change from slow, to hind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ the signal is stopped after approximately fast, to continuous. field of view. The sensors can detect ob- three seconds to avoid, for example, it ac- If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or stacles from approximately 12 inches tivates in case of maneuver along a wall. right rear region, the display will show a (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the When the system emits a beeping sound, the single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc- volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on, region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the tion, depending on the location, type and is automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense. orientation of the obstacle. display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 140 In general, the vehicle is closest to the ob- Rear ParkSense will remember the previous UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" mes- stacle when the display shows only a flashing state when the vehicle is switch off. sage for for approximately five seconds. Un- arc and the chime becomes continuous. der this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate. The color on the display depends on the CAUTION! distance and location of the obstacle. After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR ParkSense remains in this setting until the SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense next ignition cycle, even in the case of display, make sure the outer surface and the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with changing the setting of starting RUN to underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean the ParkSense switch. OFF and then again in RUN. and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if When the Rear ParkSense switch Service The Rear ParkSense System the message continues to appear, see an is pushed to disable the system, authorized dealer. the instrument cluster display will During vehicle start up, when the Rear show a message such as ParkSense System has detected a faulted If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the instrument clus- “PARKSENSE DISABLED” for approximately condition, the instrument cluster display will ter display, see an authorized dealer. five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster actuate a single chime, once per ignition Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- cycle, and it will show a message such as ParkSense System Usage Precautions ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for fur- “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR ther information. SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- NOTE: The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. Refer to “In- • Ensure that the outer surface and the un- when Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires strument Cluster Display” in your Owner’s derside of the rear bumper is clean and service. The Rear ParkSense switch LED will Manual for further information. When the clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other ob- be off when the system is enabled. If the Rear gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the struction to keep the Rear ParkSense sys- ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires system has detected a faulted condition, the tem operating properly. service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will instrument cluster display will show a mes- • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi- blink momentarily, and then the LED will be sage such as "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE brations could affect the performance of on. WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE Rear ParkSense. 141 • Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage WARNING! CAUTION! them. The sensors must not be covered backing up. You are responsible for detected at all. Obstacles located above with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. safety and must continue to pay atten- or below the sensors will not be detected Failure to do so can result in the system not tion to your surroundings. Failure to do when they are in close proximity. working properly. The Rear ParkSense sys- so can result in serious injury or death. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when tem might not detect an obstacle behind • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly using ParkSense in order to be able to the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a recommended that the ball mount and stop in time when an obstacle is de- false indication that an obstacle is behind hitch ball assembly is disconnected tected. It is recommended that the the fascia/bumper. from the vehicle when the vehicle is not driver looks over his/her shoulder when used for towing. Failure to do so can using ParkSense. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must result in injury or damage to vehicles or not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) obstacles because the hitch ball will be If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and from the rear fascia/bumper while driving much closer to the obstacle than the hitch ball assembly mounted for a long pe- the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds riod, it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING the system misinterpreting a close object and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor as a sensor problem, causing a failure indi- the continuous tone. Also, the sensors cation to be displayed in the instrument could detect the ball mount and hitch field of view. The filtering operation must be cluster. ball assembly, depending on its size and performed only by an authorized dealer. shape, giving a false indication that an WARNING! obstacle is behind the vehicle. LANESENSE • Drivers must be careful when backing up CAUTION! LaneSense Operation even when using ParkSense. Always The LaneSense system is operational at check carefully behind your vehicle, • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below look behind you, and be sure to check unable to recognize every obstacle, in- 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs obstructions, and blind spots before might be temporarily detected or not

142 uses a forward looking camera to detect lane prompt the driver to remain within the lane. To turn the LaneSense system off, push the markings and measure vehicle position When only a single lane marking is detected, LaneSense button once (LED turns on). within the lane boundaries. a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro- NOTE: vided. When both lane markings are detected and The LaneSense system will retain the last the driver unintentionally drifts out of the NOTE: system state on or off from the last ignition lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense When operating conditions have been met, cycle when the ignition is changed to the system provides a haptic warning in the form the LaneSense system will monitor if the RUN position. of torque applied to the steering wheel to driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and prompt the driver to remain within the lane provides an audible warning to the driver LaneSense Warning Message when the driver’s hands are not detected on boundaries. If the driver continues to unin- The LaneSense system will indicate the cur- the steering wheel. The system will cancel if tentionally drift out of the lane, the Lane- rent lane drift condition through the instru- the driver does not return their hands to the Sense system provides a visual warning ment cluster display. through the instrument cluster display to wheel. Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped prompt the driver to remain within the lane TurningLaneSense On Or Off boundaries. When the LaneSense system is on, the lane The default status of LaneSense is off. The driver may manually override the haptic lines are gray when both of the lane bound- warning by applying torque into the steering The LaneSense button is located on the cen- aries have not been detected and the Lane- wheel at any time. ter stack. Sense telltale is solid white. To turn the LaneSense When only a single lane marking is detected Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected system on, push the and the driver unintentionally drifts across • When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense button the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only (LED turns off). A LaneSense system provides a visual warning the left lane marking has been detected “Lane Sense On” mes- and the system is ready to provide visual through the instrument cluster display to sage is shown in the instrument cluster dis- warnings in the instrument cluster display play. if an unintentional lane departure occurs. 143 • When the LaneSense system senses the • When the LaneSense system senses a lane Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If lane has been approached and is in a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and Equipped departure situation, the left thick lane line the left thin line turn solid white. The When the LaneSense system is on, the lane flashes from white to gray, the left thin line LaneSense telltale changes from solid lines are gray when both of the lane bound- remains solid white and the LaneSense green to solid yellow. At this time torque is aries have not been detected and the Lane- telltale changes from solid white to flashing applied to the steering wheel in the oppo- yellow. site direction of the lane boundary. Sense telltale is solid white. Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected NOTE: For example: If approaching the left side of The LaneSense system operates with the the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the • When the LaneSense system is on, the similar behavior for a right lane departure right. LaneSense telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected when only the right lane marking has been • When the LaneSense system senses the and the system is ready to provide visual detected. lane has been approached and is in a lane warnings in the instrument cluster display departure situation, the left thick lane line Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected if an unintentional lane departure occurs. STARTING AND OPERATING flashes from white to gray, the left thin line • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane remains solid white and the LaneSense • When the LaneSense system senses the lines turn from gray to white to indicate that telltale changes from solid yellow to flash- lane has been approached and is in a lane both of the lane markings have been de- ing yellow. At this time, torque is applied to departure situation, the left thick lane line tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid the steering wheel in the opposite direction flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line green when both lane markings have been of the lane boundary. remains solid yellow and the LaneSense detected and the system is “armed” to telltale changes from solid white to flashing For example: If approaching the left side of provide visual warnings in the instrument yellow. cluster display and a torque warning in the the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the steering wheel if an unintentional lane de- right. NOTE: parture occurs. The LaneSense system operates with the NOTE: similar behavior for a right lane departure The LaneSense system operates with the when only the right lane marking has been similar behavior for a right lane departure. detected. 144 Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected tale changes from solid yellow to flashing • The system will not apply torque to the yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel whenever a safety system • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane steering wheel in the opposite direction of engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control lines turn from gray to white to indicate that the lane boundary. system, electronic stability control, forward both of the lane markings have been de- collision warning, etc.). tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid For example: If approaching the left side of green when both lane markings have been the lane the steering wheel will turn to the detected and the system is “armed” to right. REAR BACK UP CAMERA provide visual warnings in the instrument The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see NOTE: cluster display and a torque warning in the an on-screen image of your vehicle's rear steering wheel if an unintentional lane de- The LaneSense system operates with the surroundings when the gear selector is put parture occurs. similar behavior for a right lane departure. into REVERSE. The image will be displayed • When the LaneSense system senses a lane Changing LaneSense Status on the touchscreen display along with a note drift situation, the left thick lane line and to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the The LaneSense system has settings to adjust left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane- top of the screen. After five seconds, this note the intensity of the torque warning and the Sense telltale changes from solid green to will disappear. The camera is located above warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you solid yellow. At this time torque is applied the rear license plate. to the steering wheel in the opposite direc- can configure through the Uconnect system tion of the lane boundary. screen. For example: If approaching the left side of NOTE: the lane the steering wheel will turn to the • When enabled the system operates above right. 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph • When the LaneSense system senses the (180 km/h). lane has been approached and is in a lane • Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn- departure situation, the left thick lane line ings. flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell- 145 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE top of the camera screen is pressed. Display (with camera delay turned off), the rear cam- of the camera image after shifting out of era mode is exited and the navigation or REVERSE can be disabled via Uconnect Set- audio screen appears again. tings. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid (with camera delay turned on), the camera on the image to illustrate the width of the image will continue to be displayed for up to vehicle and its projected backup path based 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE on the steering wheel position. unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph Different colored zones indicate the distance (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or to the rear of the vehicle. Parking Camera the ignition is switched to the OFF position. The following table shows the approximate A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available when the vehicle is not in RE- distances for each zone:

STARTING AND OPERATING VERSE or if touchscreen button “X” at the Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle Red 0-1ft(0-30cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance WARNING! WARNING! builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, Drivers must be careful when backing up vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestri- rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do even when using the Rear Back Up Cam- ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, not cover the lens. era. Always check carefully behind your or blind spots before backing up. You are

146 WARNING! FOUR WHEEL DRIVE CAUTION! Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive responsible for the safety of your surround- All wheels must have the same size and Low (4WD Low) ings and must continue to pay attention type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be while backing up. Failure to do so can Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power used. Unequal tire size may cause failure result in serious injury or death. Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic of the power transfer unit. with no driver inputs or additional driving CAUTION! skills required. Under normal driving condi- Four Wheel Drive (4x4) tions, the front wheels provide most of the • To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic traction. If the front wheels begin to lose in normal driving mode. Camera should only be used as a parking traction, power is shifted automatically to the aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable rear wheels. The greater the front wheel trac- NOTE: to view every obstacle or object in your tion loss, the greater the power transfer to the It is not possible to carry out the change of drive path. rear wheels. mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle 75 mph (120 km/h). must be driven slowly when using the Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop throttle input (where one may have no wheel Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4) spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a in time when an obstacle is seen. It is The buttons for the activation of four wheel preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch recommended that the driver look fre- drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain and performance characteristics. quently over his/her shoulder when us- and allow you to select the following: ing the Rear Back Up Camera. • 4WD LOCK • 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)

147 Active Drive Control — If Equipped Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument Models Only) cluster will display the message "4WD LOW" once the shift is complete. NOTE: • Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is complete. • The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD Low" icon. Disabling 4WD LOW To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be stationary and the transmission

STARTING AND OPERATING shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW Selec-Terrain Switch button once. Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to SELEC-TERRAIN ensure immediate availability of torque to the The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in off-road performance in all modes. To enable Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of AUTO mode and automatic in the other driv- 4WD Low, please follow the steps below: the vehicle control systems, along with driver ing mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the input, to provide the best performance for all Enabling 4WD LOW terrains. following ways: With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in • When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. RUN mode or with the engine running, shift • When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated the transmission into NEUTRAL and push from AUTO to any other off-road modes.

148 Mode Selection Guide • SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability under conditions of bad weather. Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the It's used on and off road and on surfaces desired mode. with poor traction, such as roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission will use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low (Trailhawk models only). • SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission is set to provide maximum traction. This mode allows more Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) wheel spin and higher shift points to help motor through loose areas. • AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous operation, is fully automatic • MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces Selec-Terrain Switch and can be used on and off road. This mode with poor traction, such as roads covered by balances traction to ensure maneuverabil- mud or wet grass. ity and acceleration improvement com- pared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit.

149 • ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only Opening The Door • Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then available in 4WD LOW range. The device close the door. For filling proceed as follows: sets the vehicle to maximize traction and Emergency Refueling Procedure allow the highest steering capacity for off- • Open the door, by pushing and releasing on road surfaces. This mode gives you the the indentation point indicated by the ar- If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows: row. maximum performance off-road. Use for • Open the liftgate and remove the emer- low speed obstacles such as large rocks, gency fuel fill funnel located in the cargo deep ruts, etc. area. NOTE: • Open the fuel door. • Rock mode is only available on the vehicles • Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the equipped with the Trailhawk package. filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank. • Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” located in the Owner’s Manual for further information. ADDING FUEL The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper Fuel Filler Door placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically upon • Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. proceed with filling the fuel tank. The Capless Fuel System is designed so that • Before removing the nozzle, wait at least it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of 10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside fuel. of the tank. Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel 150 • Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and TRAILER TOWING close the door. WARNING! increases inside the tank, creating dan- • Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer cargo area. gerous conditions. Weight Ratings) • Do not approach the neck of the tank with open flames or lit cigarettes its an The following chart provides the maximum WARNING! extreme fire hazard. Also, avoid close trailer weight ratings towable for your given • Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of contact with the filler pipe with your drivetrain. face, do not inhale harmful vapors. the filler neck other than is provided on 1.4L Turbo Engine the car. • Do not use your mobile phone in the • The use of objects/plugs do not comply vicinity of the pump fuel nozzle, it can Trailer towing is not recommended. with the vehicle and may cause pressure be a possible risk of fire.

Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note) 2.4L 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

151 RECREATIONAL TOWING TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK

NOTE: Recreational Towing • Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. • When towing your vehicle, always follow Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) • Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place applicable state and provincial laws. Con- the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine tact state and provincial Highway Safety Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the OFF. offices for additional details. front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be

STARTING AND OPERATING • Properly secure the front wheels to the accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four feature is disabled before towing this ve- instructions. wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park follow this procedure: • Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake not start the engine. feature is enabled or disabled via the cus- • Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, tomer programmable features in the following the dolly manufacturer's instruc- • Press and hold the brake pedal. Uconnect Settings. tions.

152 • Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB). CAUTION! CAUTION! • Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake • Towing this vehicle in violation of the pedal. Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels above requirements can cause severe on the ground can cause severe transmis- transmission damage. Damage from im- CAUTION! sion and/or power transfer unit damage. proper towing is not covered under the Damage from improper towing is not cov- New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to ered under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground. Recreational towing (with all four wheels on • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT released, and remains released, while ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a being towed. flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

153 154 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS. . .156 Road Tire Installation ...... 168 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .174 BULB REPLACEMENT...... 156 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .174 EQUIPPED...... 169 Replacement Bulbs ...... 156 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .174 FUSES...... 157 Tire Service Kit Storage ...... 169 Tire Service Kit Components And FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .175 Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Operation ...... 169 Unit ...... 158 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .176 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . .170 Body Computer Fuse Center...... 161 Front Wheel Drive (FWD)...... 177 Replacing The Sealant ...... 171 Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Four Wheel Drive (4WD) ...... 177 Unit ...... 162 JUMPSTARTING...... 171 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped. .178 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .163 Preparations For Jump Start...... 172 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . .164 Jump Starting Procedure...... 173 SYSTEM(EARS)...... 178 Preparations For Jacking ...... 165 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .178 Jacking Instructions ...... 165

155 HAZARD WARNING This is an emergency warning system and it NOTE: FLASHERS should not be used when the vehicle is in With extended use the Hazard Warning flash- motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled ers may wear down your battery. The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located and it is creating a safety hazard for other on the switch bank below the radio. motorists. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard When you must leave the vehicle to seek Warning Flasher. When the switch is assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will activated, all directional turn signals continue to operate even though the ignition will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic is placed in OFF mode. of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. BULB REPLACEMENT IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Replacement Bulbs Interior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Front Courtesy Light C5W Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W Interior Lights W5W Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W

156 Exterior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Bi-Xenon HID Headlamps (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13 Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL ) P21/5W Front Direction Indicator Lamps PY21W Front Fog Lamps H11 Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Reverse W16W License Plate Lamp W5W

FUSES WARNING! WARNING! result in serious personal injury, fire • If a general protection fuse for safety WARNING! and/or property damage. systems (air bag system, braking sys- • When replacing a blown fuse, always use • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that tem), power unit systems (engine sys- an appropriate replacement fuse with the ignition is off and that all the other tem, gearbox system) or steering system the same amp rating as the original fuse. services are switched off and/or disen- blows, contact an authorized dealer. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of gaged. higher amp rating. Never replace a • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact blown fuse with metal wires or any other an authorized dealer. material. Failure to use proper fuses may

157 Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Refer to your Owner's Manual for further fuse Unit information The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Engine Compartment Fuse Location

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering

158 Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F06 20 Amp Yellow – – Engine Cooling fan F07 40 Amp Orange – 1.4 With- – – Engine Cooling fan out A/C 50 Amp Red – 1.4 With A/C And All 2.4 Models F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn F11 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines Supply Secondary Loads 25 Amp Clear – 2.4 En- gines F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heater "Blow By" F14 – – 5 Amp Tan Pump Power "After Run" F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmis- sion F17 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines Supply Primary Loads 15 Amp Blue – 2.4 En- gines F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Outlet Igni- tion Powered F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor

159 Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four- Wheel Drive F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Control Module En- gine F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If Equipped F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Au- tomatic Transmission F30 – – 20 Amp Yellow (Customer 12V Rear Cargo Outlet Con- Installed) stant Battery Powered F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)

160 Body Computer Fuse Center For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer. The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel. Cavity Mini Fuse Description F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side) F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side) F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, Alarm, Power Folding Outside Mirrors, USB Port F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side) F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side) F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Mirror, Electric Motor Retractable Roof, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, ESL F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag

161 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F51 7.5 Amp Brown Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light, Air Condi- tioning Compressor, Brake Pedal Switch (NC), Plaque Automatic Transmission, Compass, Rear Camera, Leveling Headlights, Air Condi- tioning F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket

Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of To access the fuses, remove the access door the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if IN CASE OF EMERGENCY from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle. Fuse Holder No. 1 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY F4 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side) F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side) F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (Driver Side And Passenger Side)

162 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F7 30 Amp Green Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats (Driver Side And Passenger Side) F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats

On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun visor of the retractable roof. Fuse Holder No. 2 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side) F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side)

JACKING AND TIRE WARNING! WARNING! CHANGING • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan- • Never start or run the engine while the gerous. The vehicle could slip off the vehicle is on a jack. WARNING! jack and fall on you. You could be • The jack is designed to be used as a tool crushed. Never put any part of your body for changing tires only. The jack should • Do not attempt to change a tire on the under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you not be used to lift the vehicle for service side of the vehicle close to moving traf- need to get under a raised vehicle, take purposes. The vehicle should be jacked fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid it to a service center where it can be on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or the danger of being hit when operating raised on a lift. slippery areas. the jack or changing the wheel.

163 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage 1. Open the liftgate. The jack and tools are located in the rear 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor storage compartment if equipped, inside a pull strap. special container. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 4. Remove the chocks. 5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench. 6. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Jack And Tools collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Jack And Tools Location 1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench jack parts and the spare tire in the places 2 — Jack provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re- 3 — Emergency Funnel paired or replaced immediately. 4 — Wheel Chocks 5 — Screwdriver 6 — Emergency Allen Key

164 Preparations For Jacking Jacking Instructions 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as pos- WARNING! sible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or WARNING! damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as Do not attempt to change a tire on the side far from the edge of the roadway as of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull possible before raising the vehicle. far enough off the road to avoid being hit • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. when operating the jack or changing the • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel. wheel to be raised. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Apply the parking brake and place an automatic transmission in PARK. 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake. NOTE: • Never start or run the engine with the 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (auto- Passengers should not remain in the vehicle vehicle on a jack. matic transmission) or REVERSE (manual when the vehicle is being jacked. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when transmission). it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is 5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position. on a jack. If you need to get under a 6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel raised vehicle, take it to a service center diagonally opposite of the jacking posi- where it can be raised on a lift. tion. For example, if changing the right • Only use the jack in the positions indi- front tire, chock the left rear wheel. cated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

165 2. If equipped with wheels where the center WARNING! cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel • If working on or near a roadway, be bolt wrench to pry the center cap off extremely careful of motor traffic. carefully before raising the vehicle. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel be stowed with the valve stem facing the bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the ground. wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location that is closest to the flat tire. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Jacking location is indicated by a Jack Warning Label stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack CAUTION! saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cut- Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by out in the sill cladding. jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. Jacking Locations 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.

166 WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire. Front Jacking Location Mounting Spare Tire CAUTION! NOTE: Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle • Your vehicle may be equipped with a could be damaged if the spare tire is compact spare tire or a limited — use mounted incorrectly. spare tire. Refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Servicing And Mainte- nance” in your Owner’s Manual for further information. • For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel Rear Jacking Location cover on the compact spare.

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove 8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded the flat tire. end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

167 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning WARNING! WARNING! the jack handle counterclockwise. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel collision or hard stop could endanger the down on the wrench while at the end of bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the the handle for increased leverage. Tighten Failure to follow this warning may result in jack parts and the spare tire in the places the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each serious injury. provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re- wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Re- paired or replaced immediately. 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning fer to “Torque Specifications” in the the jack handle counterclockwise. Road Tire Installation “Technical Specifications” section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. down on the wrench while at the end of the correct tightness, have them checked the handle for increased leverage. 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the with a torque wrench by an authorized IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the dealer or service station. until each wheel bolt has been tightened wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. 5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools in “Technical Specifications” for the WARNING! back in the proper storage location. Re- proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about lease the Electric Park Brake before driv- the correct tightness, have them To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off ing the vehicle. the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel checked with a torque wrench by an 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel authorized dealer or at a service station. bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure 11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, serious injury. that all wheel bolts are properly seated and flat tire. against the wheel.

168 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF Tire Service Kit Components And If a tire is punctured, you can make a first Operation emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit EQUIPPED located in the rear storage compartment in- Tire Service Kit Storage side the storage container. The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can storage compartment inside a storage con- be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather tainer. Located inside the container are a conditions. Do not remove the foreign object screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel. from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail. To access the Tire Service Kit open the lift- 1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the ve- gate and remove the load floor. hicle, take it out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve. 2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine. 3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to Tire Service Kit Components the “I” position. The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air will 1 — Power Plug (located on bottom inflate the tire. side of Tire Service Kit) 2 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 3 — Power Button 4 — Pressure Gauge 5 — Warning Label

169 Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions should be reached within 20 minutes. If WARNING! the pressure has not been reached turn ure to follow this warning can result in WARNING! off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive injuries that are serious or fatal to you, the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and your passengers, and others around you. • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side Have the tire checked as soon as possible forth, to better distribute the sealant in- of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far at an authorized dealer. side the tire. enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or 4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the Kit. compressor directly to the tire valve and above repeat the inflation process to • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the repeat the inflation process. reach the correct tire pressure and con- vehicle under the following circum- tinue driving. When the correct pressure has been stances: reached, start driving the vehicle to uni- 5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle – If the puncture in the tire tread is IN CASE OF EMERGENCY formly distribute the sealant inside the and place it on the dashboard as a re- approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check minder to the driver that the tire has been larger. the tire pressure. If the pressure is below treated with Tire Service Kit. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, – If the tire has any damage from as the tire is too damaged, and contact WARNING! driving with extremely low tire pres- the nearest authorized dealer. sure. The metal end fitting from Power Plug may – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. WARNING! get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. – If the wheel has any damage. Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire – If you are unsure of the condition of repair. Have the tire inspected and re- the tire or the wheel. paired or replaced after using Tire Service • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) flames or heat source. until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail-

170 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward vomiting! Consult a physician immedi- Store the sealant canister in its special in a collision or hard stop could endan- ately. compartment, away from sources of heat. ger the occupants of the vehicle. Always Failure to follow this WARNING may result stow the Tire Service Kit in the place Replacing The Sealant in sealant canister rupture and serious provided. Failure to follow these warn- injury or death. ings can result in injuries that are seri- NOTE: ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and Replace the sealant canister prior to the ex- others around you. piration date at an authorized dealer. JUMP STARTING • Take care not to allow the contents of If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can Tire Service Kit to come in contact with be jump-started using a set of jumper cables hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit and a battery in another vehicle or by using a sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, portable battery booster pack. Jump starting or absorbed through the skin. It causes can be dangerous if done improperly so skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. please follow the procedures in this section Flush immediately with plenty of water if carefully. there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if NOTE: there is any contact with clothing. When using a portable battery booster pack • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con- follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc- tains latex. In case of an allergic reac- tions and precautions. tion or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location and drink plenty of water. Do not induce

171 WARNING! WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery You can be injured by moving fan is frozen. It could rupture or explode and blades. cause personal injury. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. CAUTION! You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can Do not use a portable battery booster pack burn your skin or eyes and generate or any other booster source with a system hydrogen gas which is flammable and voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to explosive. Keep open flames or sparks the battery, starter motor, alternator or away from the battery. electrical system may occur. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Proceed as follows: Preparations For Jump Start Positive Battery Post 1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the The battery in your vehicle is located in the NOTE: automatic transmission into PARK front of the engine compartment, behind the The positive battery post is covered with a (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and left headlight assembly. protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain place the ignition OFF. access to the positive battery post. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec- WARNING! essary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling battery, park the vehicle within the fan whenever the hood is raised. It can jumper cables reach, set the parking start anytime the ignition switch is ON. brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

172 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive 6. Once the engine is started, remove the WARNING! (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Do not allow vehicles to touch each other the booster battery. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables as this could establish a ground connec- 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper tion and personal injury could result. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the cable to the negative (-) post of the jumper cable from the engine ground of booster battery. Jump Starting Procedure the vehicle with the discharged battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega- WARNING! (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) (exposed metal part of the discharged post of the booster battery. Failure to follow this jump starting proce- vehicle’s engine) away from the battery 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the dure could result in personal injury or and the fuel injection system. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of property damage due to battery explosion. the booster battery. WARNING! CAUTION! 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi- Do not connect the jumper cable to the tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) Failure to follow these procedures could negative (-) post of the discharged battery. post of the vehicle with the discharged result in damage to the charging system of The resulting electrical spark could cause battery. the battery to explode and could result in the booster vehicle or the discharged ve- If frequent jump starting is required to start personal injury. Only use the specific hicle. your vehicle you should have the battery and ground point, do not use any other exposed charging system inspected at an authorized Connecting The Jumper Cables metal parts. dealer. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the cable to the positive (+) post of the dis- booster battery, let the engine idle a few charged vehicle. minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

173 • On the highways — slow down. • You can also turn the temperature control CAUTION! to maximum heat, the mode control to floor • In city traffic — while stopped, put trans- and the blower control to high. This allows Accessories plugged into the vehicle mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the heater core to act as a supplement to power outlets draw power from the vehi- engine idle speed. cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., the radiator and aids in removing heat from cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if the engine cooling system. plugged in long enough without engine CAUTION! operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis- Driving with a hot cooling system could WARNING! charge sufficiently to degrade battery life damage your vehicle. If the temperature You or others can be badly burned by hot and/or prevent the engine from starting. gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con- your radiator. If you see or hear steam ditioner turned off until the pointer drops REFUELING IN EMERGENCY coming from under the hood, do not open back into the normal range. If the pointer

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the hood until the radiator has had time to The fuel filling procedure in case of emer- remains on the “H” and you hear continu- cool. Never try to open a cooling system gency is described in the “Emergency Refu- ous chimes, turn the engine off immedi- pressure cap when the radiator or coolant eling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding Fuel” in ately and call for service. “Starting And Operating” for further informa- bottle is hot. tion. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE IF YOUR ENGINE down an impending overheat condition: If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector OVERHEATS • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. cannot be moved out of the PARK position, In any of the following situations, you can The A/C system adds heat to the engine you can use the following procedure to tem- reduce the potential for overheating your en- cooling system and turning the A/C off can porarily move the gear selector: help remove this heat. gine by taking the appropriate action. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.

174 3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot 7. The vehicle may then be started in remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec- assembly from the bezel. NEUTRAL. onds, you must press the brake pedal to 8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the engage DRIVE or REVERSE. bezel. NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con- snow, it can often be moved using a rocking trol” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left further information. Once the vehicle has to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again and hold the lock button on the gear selector. to restore "ESC On" mode. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or WARNING! SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Gear Selector Bezel Location transmission), while gently pressing the ac- Forces generated by excessive wheel celerator. 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the speeds may cause damage, or even failure, brake pedal. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal of the axle and tires. A tire could explode pressure that will maintain the rocking mo- and injure someone. Do not spin your ve- 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool tion without spinning the wheels or racing the hicle's wheels faster than 30 mph down into the gear selector override ac- engine. (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds cess hole (at the right front corner of the continuously without stopping when you gear selector assembly), and push and For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: are stuck and do not let anyone near a hold the override release lever down. Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph position. (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission 175 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift- above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear • Racing the engine or spinning the ing between DRIVE/SECOND gear and (no transmission shifting occurring). wheels may lead to transmission over- REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster heating and failure. Allow the engine to than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL TOWING A DISABLED damage may result. for at least one minute after every five • Revving the engine or spinning the VEHICLE rocking-motion cycles. This will mini- wheels too fast may lead to transmission mize overheating and reduce the risk of This section describes procedures for towing overheating and failure. It can also dam- clutch or transmission failure during a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing age the tires. Do not spin the wheels prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. service.

Wheels OFF The

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Towing Condition FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Ground Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack- NOTE: to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles • Vehicles with a discharged battery or total tow bars and other equipment designed for under tow must be observed. electrical failure when the Electric Park this purpose, following equipment manufac- Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing ground when moving the vehicle onto a device to main structural members of the flatbed. 176 • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Four Wheel Drive (4WD) feature is disabled before towing this ve- The manufacturer requires towing with all hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park The manufacturer recommends towing your four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, feature is enabled or disabled via the cus- on a flatbed. or with one end of the vehicle raised and the tomer programmable features in the If flatbed equipment is not available, this opposite end on a towing dolly. Uconnect Settings. vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF If you must use the accessories (wipers, de- the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift CAUTION! frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition equipment with the front wheels raised). • DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is NOTE: wheels on the ground. Damage to the unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is dis- Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re- charged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in drivetrain will result. leased, and remains released, while being • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be this section for instructions on shifting the towed. used. Internal damage to the transmis- transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle sion or power transfer unit will occur if a can be moved. CAUTION! front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe above requirements can cause severe • Do not use sling type equipment when transmission damage. Damage from im- transmission and/or power transfer unit towing. Vehicle damage may occur. proper towing is not covered under the damage. Damage from improper towing • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed New Vehicle Limited Warranty. is not covered under the New Vehicle truck, do not attach to front or rear Limited Warranty. suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

177 Emergency TowHooks — If Equipped Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- WARNING! tems” in “Safety” for further information on If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, the Enhanced Accident Response System there will be one in the rear and two mounted • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri- (EARS) function. on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will ous injury or death. be located on the driver's side of the vehicle. • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling EVENT DATA RECORDER NOTE: with tow hooks. Tow straps may become (EDR) For off-road recovery, it is recommended to disengaged, causing serious injury. use both of the front tow hooks to minimize This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data the risk of damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in under- Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to standing how a vehicle’s systems performed without opening the door. During towing re- rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not under certain crash or near crash-like situa- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY member that not having the aid of the power use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit- brakes and the electromechanical power highway towing. You could damage your ting a road obstacle. steering, greater force is needed in applying vehicle. the brakes and steering of the vehicle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- ENHANCED ACCIDENT tems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

178 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 180 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 190 Treadwear ...... 210 Maintenance Plan ...... 180 RAISINGTHEVEHICLE...... 192 Traction Grades ...... 210 Temperature Grades...... 210 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 185 TIRES...... 192 1.4L Turbo Engine ...... 185 Tire Safety Information ...... 192 STORINGTHEVEHICLE...... 211 2.4L Engine ...... 186 Tires — General Information ...... 200 BODYWORK...... 211 Checking Oil Level ...... 187 Tire Types ...... 204 Preserving The Bodywork ...... 211 Cooling System ...... 187 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 205 INTERIORS...... 212 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 188 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 206 Brake System ...... 188 Tire Chains (Traction Devices)...... 207 Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 212 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .189 Tire Rotation Recommendations .....208 Plastic And Coated Parts...... 213 Leather Parts...... 213 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped.189 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA- Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 189 TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY Glass Surfaces ...... 214 DEALER SERVICE ...... 190 GRADES...... 209

179 SCHEDULED SERVICING NOTE: • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser- Under no circumstances should oil change voir, and brake master cylinder reservoir, Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), and fill as needed. oil change indicator system. The oil change one year or 350 hours of engine run time, • Check function of all interior and exterior indicator system will remind you that it is whichever comes first. The 350 hours of lights. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled engine run or idle time is generally only a maintenance. concern for fleet customers. Maintenance Plan Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Severe Duty All Models Required Maintenance Intervals. change indicator message will illuminate in At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil the instrument cluster. This means that ser- Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Change Indicator System: vice is required for your vehicle. Operating (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time Change oil and filter. conditions such as frequent short-trips, if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi- trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient road environment or is operated predomi- nals as required. temperatures will influence when the nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” mes- This type of vehicle use is considered Severe and hoses. sage is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- Duty. Inspect engine cooling system protection

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and hoses. tions can cause the change oil message to NOTE: Inspect exhaust system. illuminate as early as 3,500 miles The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your ve- Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or under these conditions. off-road conditions. hicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the • Check engine oil level. An authorized dealer will reset the oil change following page for the required maintenance indicator message after completing the • Check windshield washer fluid level. intervals. scheduled oil change. • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage.

180 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service ••••••••• • • • • • • Kit expiration date (if equipped). Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, ••••••••• • • • • • • passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, wind- ••••••••• • • • • • • shield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.). Check engine control system operation ••••••••• • • • • • • (via diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - ••••• • • brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Check windshield/rear window wiper •• ••• • • • blade position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer •• ••• • • • system and adjust jets if necessary.

181 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and cleanliness and lubrication of •• ••• • • • linkages. Visually check the condition and wear of ••••••••• • • • • • • the front and rear brakes. Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV ••••• • • joints and replace if necessary. Visual inspect the condition of the ac- •• • cessory drive belt. Check the tension of the accessory drive ••••• • • belt. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and, • idler pulley. Inspect and replace PCV valve if neces- • sary. Change engine oil and replace oil filter.* Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • • Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • • Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo en- ••• • • gine). ** Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). ** •

182 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Replace engine air filter. # • • • • • Replace brake fluid every two years. *** • • • • • • • Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial ser- • • vice), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles •• (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo En- • gine).

○ Recommend replacement # The engine air cleaner should be in- * The oil and oil filter replacement must be spected at every oil change if used in dusty carried out when indicated by a warning • Mandatory service areas. light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

183 ** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The fol- WARNING! lowing are essential to ensure correct opera- • You can be badly injured working on or tion and prevent serious damage to the en- around a motor vehicle. Do only service gine: work for which you have the knowledge • Only use spark plugs of the same make and and the right equipment. If you have any type which are specially certified for such doubt about your ability to perform a engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in service job, take your vehicle to a com- “Technical Specifications” for further in- petent mechanic. formation). • Failure to properly inspect and maintain • Strictly comply with the spark plug replace- your vehicle could result in a component ment interval given in the “Maintenance malfunction and effect vehicle handling Schedule” for spark plug replacement. and performance. This could cause an accident. • Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE *** The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.

184 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1.4L TurboEngine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap

185 2.4L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap 2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

186 Checking Oil Level CAUTION! WARNING! To assure proper engine lubrication, the en- Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfill- • When working near the radiator cooling gine oil must be maintained at the correct fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, ing the engine with oil will cause oil aera- tion, which can lead to loss of oil pressure turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The such as every fuel stop. The best time to fan is temperature controlled and can check the engine oil level is approximately and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil tem- start at any time the ignition is in the ON five minutes after a fully warmed engine is perature could damage your engine. mode. shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Check- Cooling System ing engine oil level when the engine is cold Coolant Checks will give you an incorrect reading. WARNING! Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level every 12 months (before the onset of freezing ground, and approximately five minutes after • You or others can be badly burned by hot weather, where applicable). If the engine a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear- the accuracy of the oil level readings. Main- from your radiator. If you see or hear ance, the system should be drained, flushed tain the oil level between the range markings steam coming from under the hood, do and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated not open the hood until the radiator has freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Li- had time to cool. Never open a cooling for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If ters) of oil when the reading is at the low end system pressure cap when the radiator or dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a of the indicated range will result in the oil coolant bottle is hot. garden hose vertically down the face of the level at the full end of the indicator range. • Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry condenser. away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.

187 Adding Washer Fluid NOTE: WARNING! If your vehicle is equipped with a manual The windshield washer fluid reservoir is lo- Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure transmission, the brake fluid reservoir sup- cated in the engine compartment, and the and possibly a collision. Driving with your plies fluid to both the brake system and the fluid level should be checked at regular inter- foot resting or riding on the brake pedal clutch release system. The two systems are vals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer can result in abnormally high brake tem- separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Re- peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos- system will not affect the other system. The fer to “Engine Compartment” in this section sible brake damage. Riding the brakes manual transmission clutch release system for further information. may also reduce braking capacity in an should not require fluid replacement during emergency. the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid WARNING! reservoir is low and the brake system does not Brake Master Cylinder Commercially available windshield washer indicate any leaks or other problems, it may solvents are flammable. They could ignite The fluid level in the master cylinder should be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch and burn you. Care must be exercised be checked when performing under hood release system. See an authorized dealer for when filling or working around the washer services, or immediately if the “Brake Warn- service. solution. ing Light” is on. Use only manufacturer's recommended SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Brake System Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin- brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” der area before removing the cap. If neces- in the “Technical Specifications” section for In order to assure brake system performance, sary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to further information. all brake system components should be in- the requirements described on the brake spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte- fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to WARNING! nance Plan” in this section for the proper fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid • Use only manufacturer’s recommended maintenance intervals. level should be checked when the pads are brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri- replaced. However, low fluid level may be cants” in the “Technical Specifications” caused by a leak and a checkup may be section for further information. Using needed. 188 checks are not required; therefore the trans- WARNING! CAUTION! mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer the wrong type of brake fluid can se- Use of improper brake fluids will affect can check your transmission fluid level using verely damage your brake system and/or overall clutch system performance. Im- special service tools. If you notice fluid leak- impair its performance. The proper type proper brake fluids may damage the clutch age or transmission malfunction, visit an au- of brake fluid for your vehicle is also system resulting in loss of clutch function thorized dealer immediately to have the identified on the original factory in- and the ability to shift the transmission. transmission fluid level checked. Operating stalled hydraulic master cylinder reser- the vehicle with an improper fluid level can voir. Manual Transmission — If Equipped cause severe transmission damage. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake Fluid Level Check CAUTION! fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly Check the fluid level by removing the fill closed container. Keep the master cylin- If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an plug. The fluid level should be between the der reservoir cap secured at all times. authorized dealer immediately. Severe Brake fluid in a open container absorbs bottom of the fill hole and a point not more transmission damage may occur. An au- moisture from the air resulting in a lower than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of thorized dealer has the proper tools to boiling point. This may cause it to boil the hole. adjust the fluid level accurately. unexpectedly during hard or prolonged Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper Maintenance-Free Battery braking, resulting in sudden brake fail- level. ure. This could result in a collision. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance- Please see an authorized dealer for service. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can free battery. You will never have to add water, result in spilling brake fluid on hot en- Automatic Transmission — If Equipped nor is periodic maintenance required. gine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage Fluid Level Check WARNING! painted and vinyl surfaces, care should The fluid level is preset at the factory and be taken to avoid its contact with these • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution does not require adjustment under normal surfaces. and can burn or even blind you. Do not operating conditions. Routine fluid level 189 WARNING! CAUTION! WARNING!

allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi- You can be badly injured working on or skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a fied on the battery case. Cable clamps around a motor vehicle. Only do service battery when attaching clamps. If acid should be tight on the terminal posts work for which you have the knowledge splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the and free of corrosion. and the proper equipment. If you have any area immediately with large amounts of • If a “fast charger” is used while the doubt about your ability to perform a ser- water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce- battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vice job, take your vehicle to a competent dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for vehicle battery cables before connecting mechanic. further information. the charger to the battery. Do not use a • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. “fast charger” to provide starting volt- Keep flame or sparks away from the age. Windshield Wiper Blades battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output DEALER SERVICE Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable and the windshield periodically with a sponge clamps to touch each other. An authorized dealer has the qualified ser- or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. • Battery posts, terminals, and related ac- vice personnel, special tools, and equipment This will remove accumulations of salt or road SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE cessories contain lead and lead com- to perform all service operations in an expert film. pounds. Wash hands after handling. manner. Service Manuals are available which Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long include detailed service information for your periods may cause deterioration of the wiper CAUTION! vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be- blades. Always use washer fluid when using fore attempting any procedure yourself. the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry • It is essential when replacing the cables windshield. on the battery that the positive cable is NOTE: attached to the positive post and the Intentional tampering with emissions control Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost negative cable is attached to the nega- systems may void your warranty and could or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade tive post. Battery posts are marked posi- result in civil penalties being assessed rubber out of contact with petroleum prod- against you. ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 190 NOTE: At every valid activation of Service Position 2. Push the release button on the arm of the Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- command, the wiper blades are activated for wiper blade. pending on geographical area and frequency 250 ms. 3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it. of use. Poor performance of blades may be The Service Position command can be represent with chattering, marks, water lines or peated several times to bring the blades into wet spots. If any of these conditions are the desired position, up to a maximum of present, clean the wiper blades or replace as three times. necessary. After three subsequent activations the strat- Service Position Strategy egy is disabled. The service position allows the wiper blades Function Deactivation: to be placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily changed. The functionality is reset if: To enable the Service Position Strategy, the • The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN wipers must be in the Park position before position. placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF posi- • Number of subsequent activations is three. tion. • Two minutes timer has expired after turning 1 — Wiper Blade the ignition OFF. Service mode must be activated within two 2 — Release Button minutes after the ignition is placed in the NOTE: 3 — Wiper Arm STOP/OFF position. When turning the ignition ON, the blades will To have a correct activation of strategy, the go into the parking position. 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the Service Position command (antipanic) must Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation wiper blade until it snaps into place. be active for at least half a second. 1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield. 191 Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation TIRES Tire Markings 1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to Tire Safety Information raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass. Tire safety information will cover aspects of 2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the the following information: Tire Markings, Tire wiper blade end while pushing the wiper Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the wiper arm. 3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper Tire Markings arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum it snaps into place. Safety Stan- Load dards Code RAISING THE VEHICLE (TIN) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE In the case where it is necessary to raise the 2 — Size Desig- 5 — Maximum vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service nation Pressure station. 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, Description Traction and Temperature Grades

192 NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based based on U.S. design standards. The size design standards and it begins with the tire on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires designation for LT-Metric tires is the same diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex- have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall as for P-Metric tires except for the letters ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT. preceding the size designation. Example: “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre- P215/65R15 95H. ceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed • Temporary spare tires are designed for tem- to this standard have the tire size molded porary emergency use only. Temporary high into the sidewall beginning with the section pressure compact spare tires have the letter width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced- size designation. Example: 215/ ing the size designation. Example: T145/ 65R15 96H. 80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

193 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black The TIN may be found on one or both sides of sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the tire; however, the date code may only be the TIN is not found on the outboard side, on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will then you will find it on the inboard side of the have the full TIN, including the date code, tire.

194 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

195 Term Definition Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

196 Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement The vehicle maximum load on the tire must “The combined weight of occupants and not exceed the load carrying capacity of the cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the on the Tire and Loading Information placard. tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to The combined weight of occupants, cargo/ the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli- inflation pressures specified on the Tire and cable) should never exceed the weight refer- Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Tire And Loading Information Placard enced here. Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” This placard tells you important information section of your Owner’s Manual. Steps For Determining Correct Load about the: NOTE: Limit— 1. Number of people that can be carried in Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, (1) Locate the statement “The com- the vehicle. gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the bined weight of occupants and cargo front and rear axles must not be exceeded. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. should never exceed XXX kg or 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, (2) Determine the combined weight of rear, and spare tires. the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

197 (3) Subtract the combined weight of Metric Example For Load Limit the driver and passengers from XXX kg For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg or XXX lbs. and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo (4) The resulting figure equals the and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635- available amount of cargo and luggage 340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there NOTE: will be five 150 lb passengers in your • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load vehicle, the amount of available cargo from your trailer will be transferred to your and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. vehicle. The following table shows ex- (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) amples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of (5) Determine the combined weight of your vehicle with varying seating configura- luggage and cargo being loaded on the tions and number and size of occupants. vehicle. That weight may not safely This table is for illustration purposes only SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE exceed the available cargo and lug- and may not be accurate for the seating and gage load capacity calculated in Step load carry capacity of your vehicle. 4. • (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 198 For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

199 Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect WARNING! the stability of the vehicle and can produce a Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! feeling of sluggish response or over respon- Overloading can cause tire failure, affect siveness in the steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous vehicle handling, and increase your stop- NOTE: ping distance. Use tires of the recom- and can cause collisions. mended load capacity for your vehicle. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and • Unequal tire pressures from side to side Never overload them. can result in overheating and tire failure. may cause erratic and unpredictable steer- • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to ing response. Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may chuckholes can cause damage that re- cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Pressure sult in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to affect vehicle handling and can fail sud- the safe and satisfactory operation of your Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling denly, resulting in loss of vehicle con- vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by resistance resulting in higher fuel consump- trol. improper tire pressure: tion. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Safety and Vehicle Stability ing problems. You could lose control of Tread Wear • Economy your vehicle. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can • Unequal tire pressures from one side of • Tread Wear cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced the vehicle to the other can cause the tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire • Ride Comfort vehicle to drift to the right or left. replacement. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

200 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Inflation pressures specified on the placard Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort- tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire reduce this normal pressure build up or your able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring pressure after the vehicle has not been driven tire pressure will be too low. and uncomfortable ride. for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Inflation Pressures 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer advocates driving at safe The proper cold tire inflation pressure is must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- speeds and within posted speed limits. Where listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge sure molded into the tire sidewall. speed limits or conditions are such that the of the driver's side door. vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain- Check tire pressures more often if subject to At least once a month: ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor- a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good pressures vary with temperature changes. loading may be required for high-speed vehicle quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or make a visual judgement when determining original equipment vehicle dealer for recom- proper inflation. Tires may look properly (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire mended safe operating speeds, loading and cold inflated even when they are under-inflated. tire inflation pressures. pressure inside a garage, especially in the • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible Winter. damage. WARNING! Example: If garage temperature = 68°F CAUTION! (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F High speed driving with your vehicle under (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum This will prevent moisture and dirt from this outside temperature condition. entering the valve stem, which could dam- capacity at continuous speeds above age the valve stem. 75 mph (120 km/h).

201 Radial Ply Tires Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that Tire Spinning have experienced a loss of pressure should be When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con- WARNING! replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels Combining radial ply tires with other types (Load Index and Speed Symbol). above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than of tires on your vehicle will cause your 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped vehicle to handle poorly. The instability Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In could cause a collision. Always use radial Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive Case Of Emergency” for further information. ply tires in sets of four. Never combine 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after them with other types of tires. a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid WARNING! loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat Tire Repair mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. If your tire becomes damaged, it may be inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi Forces generated by excessive wheel repaired if it meets the following criteria: (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A run flat mode it has limited driving capabili- tire could explode and injure someone. Do • The tire has not been driven on when flat. ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than • The damage is only on the tread section of Run Flat tire is not repairable. 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec- SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your tire (sidewall damage is not repair- onds continuously when you are stuck, It is not recommended driving a vehicle able). and do not let anyone near a spinning loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while wheel, no matter what the speed. • The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan a tire is in the run flat mode. inch (6 mm). See the tire pressure monitoring section for Tread Wear Indicators Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re- more information. Tread wear indicators are in the original pairs and additional information. equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

202 normal wear patterns will reduce tread life, Replacement Tires resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be • Distance driven. inspected regularly for wear and correct cold • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer of V or higher, and Summer tires typically strongly recommends that you use tires Tire Tread have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these equivalent to the originals in size, quality and tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte- performance when replacement is needed. 1 — Worn Tire nance is highly recommended. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi- 2 — New Tire cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and WARNING! Loading Information placard or the Vehicle These indicators are molded into the bottom Tires and the spare tire should be replaced Certification Label for the size designation of of the tread grooves. They will appear as after six years, regardless of the remaining your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol bands when the tread depth becomes a tread. Failure to follow this warning can for your tire will be found on the original 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is result in sudden tire failure. You could lose equipment tire sidewall. worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire control and have a collision resulting in See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement serious injury or death. Tires” in this section for further information. the “Tire Safety Information” section of this Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place manual for more information relating to the Life Of Tire with as little exposure to light as possible. Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. The service life of a tire is dependent upon Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, It is recommended to replace the two front varying factors including, but not limited to: and gasoline. tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just • Driving style. one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns sure that the wheel’s specifications match to develop across the tire tread. These ab- those of the original wheels. 203 It is recommended you contact an authorized Summer Or Three Season Tires — If tire dealer or original equipment dealer with WARNING! Equipped any questions you may have on tire specifi- sult in tire overloading and failure. You Summer tires provide traction in both wet cations or capability. Failure to use equiva- could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and dry conditions, and are not intended to lent replacement tires may adversely affect be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of equipped with Summer tires, be aware these vehicle control. tires are not designed for Winter or cold WARNING! driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, CAUTION! than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with or speed rating other than that specified ice or snow. For more information, contact an for your vehicle. Some combinations of Replacing original tires with tires of a authorized dealer. unapproved tires and wheels may different size may result in false speedom- change suspension dimensions and per- eter and odometer readings. Summer tires do not contain the all season formance characteristics, resulting in designation or mountain/snowflake symbol changes to steering, handling, and brak- Tire Types on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in ing of your vehicle. This can cause un- sets of four; failure to do so may adversely SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE All Season Tires — If Equipped predictable handling and stress to steer- affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. ing and suspension components. You All Season tires provide traction for all sea- could lose control and have a collision sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). WARNING! resulting in serious injury or death. Use Traction levels may vary between different all Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con- only the tire and wheel sizes with load season tires. All season tires can be identi- ditions. You could lose vehicle control, ratings approved for your vehicle. fied by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa- resulting in severe injury or death. Driving • Never use a tire with a smaller load index tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires or capacity, other than what was origi- too fast for conditions also creates the only in sets of four; failure to do so may nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a possibility of loss of vehicle control. adversely affect the safety and handling of tire with a smaller load index could re- your vehicle. 204 Snow Tires While studded tires improve performance on This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this op- Some areas of the country require the use of surfaces may be poorer than that of non- tion, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can recommended tire rotation pattern. be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” studded tires. Some states prohibit studded symbol on the tire sidewall. tires; therefore, local laws should be checked Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped before using these tire types. If you need snow tires, The compact spare is for temporary emer- select tires equivalent Spare Tires — If Equipped gency use only. You can identify if your ve- in size and type to the hicle is equipped with a compact spare by For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit original equipment looking at the spare tire description on the instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire tires. Use snow tires Tire and Loading Information Placard located Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the only in sets of four; on the driver’s side door opening or on the Owner’s Manual for further information. failure to do so may sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de- adversely affect the scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” safety and handling of your vehicle. CAUTION! preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings Because of the reduced ground clearance, than what was originally equipped with your do not take your vehicle through an auto- T,S=Temporary Spare Tire vehicle and should not be operated at sus- matic car wash with a compact or limited Since this tire has limited tread life, the tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For use temporary spare installed. Damage to original equipment tire should be repaired (or speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to the vehicle may result. replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at original equipment or an authorized tire the first opportunity. dealer for recommended safe operating Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres- And Wheel — If Equipped sures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. 205 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to tire may have limited tread life. When the mount a conventional tire on the compact tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the WARNING! spare wheel, since the wheel is designed temporary use full size spare tire needs to be do not drive more than the speed listed on specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not replaced. Since it is not the same as your the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated install more than one compact spare tire and original equipment tire, replace (or repair) to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard wheel on the vehicle at any given time. the original equipment tire and reinstall on located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace Limited Use Spare — If Equipped (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your Compact and collapsible spares are for The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer- temporary emergency use only. With these gency use only. This tire is identified by a label vehicle. Failure to do so could result in spares, do not drive more than 50 mph located on the limited use spare wheel. This label loss of vehicle control. (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have contains the driving limitations for this spare. limited tread life. When the tread is worn This tire may look like the original equipped tire Wheel And Wheel TrimCare to the tread wear indicators, the temporary on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi- use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be not. Installation of this limited use spare tire num and chrome plated wheels, should be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your spare. Failure to do so could result in as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con- the original equipment tire and reinstall on the soap and water to maintain their luster and to trol. vehicle at the first opportunity. prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the Full Size Spare — If Equipped WARNING! body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the The full size spare is for temporary emer- Limited use spares are for emergency use touch. gency use only. This tire may look like the only. Installation of this limited use spare originally equipped tire on the front or rear tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

206 Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium recommended or select a non-abrasive, non- Gloss Clear Coat Wheels chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome road chemicals used to melt ice or control wheels. CAUTION! dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com- damage the wheel’s protective coating that bristle brush, metal polishes or oven pounds. They will permanently damage helps keep them from corroding and cleaner. These products may damage the this finish and such damage is not covered tarnishing. wheel's protective finish. Such damage is by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. not covered by the New Vehicle Limited HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP CAUTION! Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- on a regular basis; this is all that is re- Avoid products or automatic car washes mended. quired to maintain this finish. that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar- NOTE: ket wheel cleaners and automatic car If you intend parking or storing your vehicle Tire Chains (Traction Devices) washes may damage the wheel's protective for an extended period after cleaning the finish. Such damage is not covered by the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle Use of traction devices require sufficient tire- New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car and apply the brakes to remove the water to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or droplets from the brake components. This dations to guard against damage. equivalent is recommended. activity will remove the red rust on the brake • Traction device must be of proper size for When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ- rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when the tire, as recommended by the traction ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken braking. device manufacturer. in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning • Install on front tires only. chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or 207 • Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended: CAUTION! CAUTION! ating speed of the device manufacturer’s All Models: To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted • Because of restricted traction device • Do not use traction devices on a com- with the use of 215/65R16 tires only. clearance between tires and other sus- pact spare tire. Chain front tires ONLY. All other size tires pension components, it is important are NOT chainable. that only traction devices in good condi- Tire Rotation Recommendations • Original equipment 215/65R17 (trailhawk tion are used. Broken devices can cause The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle tires), 225/55R18 tire sizes are NOT serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme- operate at different loads and perform differ- chainable. diately if noise occurs that could indi- ent steering, handling, and braking func- cate device breakage. Remove the dam- tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal CAUTION! aged parts of the device before further rates. use. • Use on front tires ONLY. • Install device as tightly as possible and These effects can be reduced by timely rota- • Damage may result if tire chains or trac- then retighten after driving about ½ mile tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are (0.8 km). especially worthwhile with aggressive tread

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE tion devices are used with original equipment size tires. • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). designs such as those on On/Off Road type • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to and large bumps, especially with a WARNING! maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, loaded vehicle. and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on Using tires of different size and type Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec- (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles dry pavement. tion for the proper maintenance intervals. can cause unpredictable handling. You • Observe the traction device manufactur- The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear could lose control and have a collision. er’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions should be corrected prior to rotation being for use. Always use the suggested oper- performed.

208 The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota- DEPARTMENT OF tion method is the “forward cross” shown in TRANSPORTATION the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY must not be reversed. GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National High- Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation way Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the CAUTION! tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve- your vehicle. Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation hicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any All passenger vehicle tires must con- The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire difference in tire size can cause damage to form to Federal safety requirements in rotation method is the “rearward cross” the power transfer unit. Tire rotation addition to these grades. shown in the following diagram. schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.

209 Treadwear fied government test surfaces of as- temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a The Treadwear grade is a comparative phalt and concrete. A tire marked C level of performance, which all pas- rating, based on the wear rate of the may have poor traction performance. senger vehicle tires must meet under tire when tested under controlled con- WARNING! the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- ditions on a specified government test dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- course. For example, a tire graded The traction grade assigned to this sent higher levels of performance on 150 would wear one and one-half tire is based on straight-ahead brak- the laboratory test wheel, than the times as well on the government ing traction tests, and does not in- minimum required by law. course as a tire graded 100. The rela- clude acceleration, cornering, hy- tive performance of tires depends droplaning, or peak traction WARNING! upon the actual conditions of their characteristics. use, however, and may depart signifi- The temperature grade for this tire Temperature Grades cantly from the norm due to variations is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Ex- in driving habits, service practices, The Temperature grades are A (the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE cessive speed, under-inflation, or and differences in road characteristics highest), B, and C, representing the excessive loading, either separately and climate. tire's resistance to the generation of or in combination, can cause heat heat and its ability to dissipate heat, Traction Grades buildup and possible tire failure. when tested under controlled condi- The Traction grades, from highest to tions on a specified indoor laboratory lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These test wheel. grades represent the tire's ability to Sustained high temperature can cause stop on wet pavement, as measured the material of the tire to degenerate under controlled conditions on speci- and reduce tire life, and excessive 210 STORING THE VEHICLE • Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care not to damage the painted sur- CAUTION! If the vehicle should remain stationary for face by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do Before removal of the positive and nega- more than a month, observe the following not use plastic sheeting which will not allow tive terminals to the battery, wait at least a precautions: the evaporation of moisture present on the minute with ignition switch in the OFF • Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and surface of the vehicle. position and close the drivers door. When possibly airy location the windows open • Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi reconnecting the positive and negative ter- slightly. (+50 kPa) higher than recommended on minals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the the tire placard and check it periodically. • Check that the Electric Park Brake is not drivers door is closed. engaged. • Do not drain the engine cooling system. • Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from • Whenever you leave the vehicle is station- BODYWORK the battery post and be sure that the battery ary for two weeks or more, idle the engine is fully charged. During storage check bat- for approximately five minutes with the air Preserving The Bodywork tery charge quarterly. conditioning system on and high fan speed. Washing • If you do not disconnect the battery from This will ensure a proper lubrication of the • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash the electrical system, check the battery system, thus minimizing the possibility of your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car charge every thirty days. damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation. Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse • Clean and protect the painted parts by the panels completely with clear water. applying protective waxes. NOTE: • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have When the vehicle has not been started or • Clean and protect polished metal parts by accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park applying protective waxes. Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re- Start Procedure is required to start the ve- move. • Apply talcum powder to the front and rear hicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in wiper blades and leave raised from the “Starting And Operating” for further glass. information. 211 • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in INTERIORS Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, the paint, touch them up immediately. The stains and to protect your paint finish. Take cost of such repairs is considered the re- Seats And Fabric Parts care never to scratch the paint. sponsibility of the owner. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol- • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision stery and carpeting. buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin or similar cause that destroys the paint and out the paint finish. protective coating, have your vehicle re- WARNING! paired as soon as possible. The cost of such CAUTION! repairs is considered the responsibility of Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning the owner. purposes. Many are potentially flam- • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning • If you carry special cargo such as chemi- mable, and if used in closed areas they materials such as steel wool or scouring cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure may cause respiratory harm. powder that will scratch metal and that such materials are well packaged and painted surfaces. sealed. Seat Belt Maintenance • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with damage or removal of paint and decals. consider mud or stone shields behind each chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE wheel. will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Special Care • Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you soon as possible. An authorized dealer has If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- touch up paint to match the color of your solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove riage at least once a month. vehicle. the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry • It is important that the drain holes in the with a soft cloth. lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and Replace the belts if they appear frayed or trunk be kept clear and open. worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

212 cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily WARNING! CAUTION! with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a • Damage caused by these type of prod- should be taken to avoid soaking your leather collision and leave you with no protection. ucts may not be covered by your New upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use Inspect the belt system periodically, Vehicle Limited Warranty. polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de- checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to main- ately. Do not disassemble or modify the The lenses in front of the instruments in this tain the original condition. system. Seat belt assemblies must be re- vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When placed after a collision if they have been cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to NOTE: damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- avoid scratching the plastic. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends bing, etc.). 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric Plastic And Coated Parts solution may be used, but do not use high dye transfer more so than darker colors. The alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If leather is designed for easy cleaning, and Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl soap is used, wipe clean with a clean FCA recommends Mopar total care leather upholstery. damp cloth. cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. CAUTION! Leather Parts CAUTION! • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom- Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco- mended for leather upholstery. and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat rated surfaces of the interior may cause Your leather upholstery can be best preserved may result. permanent damage. Wipe away immedi- by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. ately. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp 213 Glass Surfaces Use caution when cleaning the inside rear When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray window equipped with electric defrosters or cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a windows equipped with radio antennas. Do using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or not use scrapers or other sharp instruments mirror. any commercial household-type glass that may scratch the elements. cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

214 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION .....216 2.4L Engine ...... 217 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....219 Chassis Number ...... 216 Materials Added To Fuel ...... 218 Engine...... 219 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECI- FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE Chassis ...... 220 FICATIONS...... 216 ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 218 MOPARACCESSORIES...... 221 Torque Specifications...... 216 E-85 General Information ...... 218 Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....221 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 217 FLUIDCAPACITIES...... 219 1.4L Turbo Engine ...... 217

215 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality Chassis Number six sided (hex) deep wall socket. The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a Torque Specifications plate located on the left front corner of the Wheel Bolt Torque **Wheel Wheel instrument panel cover, which is visible from Bolt Size Bolt outside the car through the windshield. Socket Size 89 Ft-Lbs M12x1.25 17mm (120 N·m)

**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) any dirt or oil before tightening. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until SPECIFICATIONS each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to nut/bolt. ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to This number is also stamped on the floor of the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re- the passenger compartment, near the right moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug front seat.

216 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- 1.4L TurboEngine tions. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering This engine is de- service for the vehicle. signed to meet all 2.4L Engine emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and All available gasoline performance when us- engines are designed ing high-quality un- to meet all emissions leaded "regular" gaso- regulations and pro- line having an octane rating of 87 using the vide excellent fuel (R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance economy and perfor- Torque Pattern and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or mance when using After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt higher is recommended. high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane rating of torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts While operating on gasoline with an octane 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of are properly seated against the wheel. number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound premium gasoline is not recommended, as it from the engine is not a cause for concern. WARNING! However, if the engine is heard making a will not provide any benefit over regular gaso- heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- line in these engines. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure this warning may result in serious injury. and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

217 While operating on gasoline with an octane Materials Added ToFuel FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound ENGINE ONLY) — IF from the engine is not a cause for concern. Designated TOP TIER EQUIPPED However, if the engine is heard making a Detergent Gasoline heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- contains a higher level E-85 General Information diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- of detergents to fur- ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure ther aide in minimiz- The information in this section is unique for and may void or not be covered by the New ing engine and fuel Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles Vehicle Limited Warranty. system deposits. When can be identified by a unique fuel filler door available, the usage of label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Poor quality gasoline can cause problems Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP to the Owner’s Manual for further tions. If you experience these symptoms, try TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. information. another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning CAUTION! TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish re- Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door moval may contain active solvents or similar label or a yellow gas cap can operate on ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas- E-85. ket and diaphragm materials.

218 FLUID CAPACITIES U.S Metric Fuel (Approximate) 1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4.0 Quarts 3.8 Liters 2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters Cooling System * 1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters 2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For- mula) 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

219 Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn- zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Transmission Fluid. Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable. DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.

220 MOPAR ACCESSORIES • In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and far more than expressive style, premium mopar.ca for Canadian residents. Authentic Accessories By Mopar protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle NOTE: • The following highlights just some of the with accessories that have been thoroughly All parts are subject to availability. many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar tested and factory-approved. featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Jeep Renegade. • For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso- ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or EXTERIOR: • Spare Tire Kit • Front End Cover • Body Graphics • Air Deflectors • Splash Guards • Trailer Hitch • Wheel Locks

INTERIOR: • Premium Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Molded Cargo Tray • Katzkin Leather Interiors • Bright Pedal Kit • Camping Tent • Slush Mats

221 ELECTRONICS: • Mopar Web (WiFi) • Park Distance Sensors • Rear View Camera • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Heated Windshield Washer Solvent

CARRIERS: • Roof Top Cargo Basket • Sport Utility Bars • Roof-mount Bike Carrier • Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Hitch-mount Bike Carriers • Roof Cargo Box Carrier

MOPAR PERFORMANCE: • Cat-back Exhaust TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

222 MULTIMEDIA

MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY ...... 225 Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Apple CarPlay Integration — If Glance...... 235 Equipped ...... 252 TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL Clock Setting ...... 236 INFORMATION ...... 226 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 254 Audio Setting ...... 236 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 226 Radio Operation ...... 237 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — Reception Conditions...... 226 Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With IF EQUIPPED ...... 255 Care And Maintenance ...... 226 iPhone) ...... 237 NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . .255 Anti-Theft Protection ...... 226 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DIS- Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF PLAY...... 238 Volume ...... 255 EQUIPPED...... 227 Uconnect 4 At A Glance ...... 238 Finding Points Of Interest ...... 257 SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...... 240 Finding A Place By Spelling The Name .257 (Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Radio ...... 241 One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .257 8.4–inch Display) ...... 227 Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 242 Setting Your Home Location...... 257 SiriusXM Guardian Activation ...... 228 Apple CarPlay Integration — If Home ...... 258 Download The Uconnect App ...... 228 Equipped ...... 243 Adding A Stop ...... 259 Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4- Taking A Detour ...... 259 NAV With 8.4-inch Display) ...... 229 INCHDISPLAY...... 245 SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .245 8.4–inch Display) ...... 259 Account ...... 229 Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...... 246 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With Built-In Features ...... 229 8.4–inch Display) ...... 260 Radio ...... 247 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .232 Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 248 UCONNECT PHONE ...... 261 UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DIS- Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free PLAY—IFEQUIPPED...... 234 Calling) ...... 261 223 Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Helpful Tips And Common Questions To SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If Phone To The Uconnect System .....264 Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your Equipped ...... 277 Common Phone Commands Uconnect System ...... 271 Register (4C/4C NAV)...... 278 (Examples) ...... 268 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During QUICKTIPS...... 272 NAV)...... 278 Call ...... 268 Introducing Uconnect ...... 272 Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)...... 278

MULTIMEDIA Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Get Started ...... 272 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 279 Vehicle ...... 268 Basic Voice Commands...... 273 Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ...... 279 Phonebook ...... 268 Radio ...... 273 Using Do Not Disturb...... 280 Voice Command Tips ...... 268 Media ...... 274 Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 280 Changing The Volume ...... 268 Phone ...... 274 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped...... 281 Using Do Not Disturb ...... 269 Voice Text Reply ...... 275 General Information...... 282 Incoming Text Messages ...... 269 Climate ...... 276 Additional Information ...... 282 Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 277

224 CYBERSECURITY • To help further improve vehicle security and WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and • It is not possible to know or to predict all breach, vehicle owners should: may be equipped with both wired and wire- of the possible outcomes if your vehi- – Routinely check less networks. These networks allow your ve- cle’s systems are breached. It may be www.driveuconnect.com/support/ hicle to send and receive information. This possible that vehicle systems, including software-update.html (U.S. Residents) information allows systems and features in safety related systems, could be im- or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian your vehicle to function properly. paired or a loss of vehicle control could Residents) to learn about available Your vehicle may be equipped with certain occur that may result in an accident Uconnect software updates. security features to reduce the risk of unau- involving serious injury or death. – Only connect and use trusted media thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys- • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, tems and wireless communications. Vehicle or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a USBs, CDs). software technology continues to evolve over trusted source. Media of unknown origin time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup- could possibly contain malicious soft- Privacy of any wireless and wired communi- pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it cations cannot be assured. Third parties may as needed. Similar to a computer or other may increase the possibility for vehicle unlawfully intercept information and private devices, your vehicle may require software systems to be breached. communications without your consent. For updates to improve the usability and perfor- • As always, if you experience unusual further information, refer to ”Data Collection mance of your systems or to reduce the po- vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac- your nearest authorized dealer immedi- Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System cess to your vehicle systems. ately. (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access NOTE: to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if Manual. the most recent version of vehicle software • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you (such as Uconnect software) is installed. directly regarding software updates.

225 TIPS CONTROLS AND • Push the button in the center to select the • Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to GENERAL INFORMATION next preset station on the radio. clean the display lens. Right Switch • Prevent any liquid from entering the sys- Steering Wheel Audio Controls tem: this could damage it beyond repair. • Push the switch up or down to increase or The steering wheel audio controls are located decrease the volume. on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Anti-Theft Protection

MULTIMEDIA • Push the button in the center to change the The system is equipped with an anti-theft source (AM, FM, SXM, Bluetooth, etc.) protection system based on the exchange of Reception Conditions information with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the vehicle. Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered This guarantees maximum safety and pre- with by the presence of mountains, buildings vents the secret code from being entered or bridges, especially when you are far away after the power supply has been discon- from the broadcaster. nected. The volume may be increased when receiving If the check has a positive outcome, the traffic alerts and news. system will start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes are not the same or if the Care And Maintenance electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask the user to enter Steering Wheel Audio Controls Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational: the secret code. See an authorized dealer for Left Switch further information. • The display lens should not come into con- • Push the switch up or down to search for tact with pointed or rigid objects which the next listenable station or select the next could damage its surface; use a soft, dry or previous Media track. anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

226 SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF • Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can operator who can connect you to emergency connect you to emergency services. EQUIPPED responders. 2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is lo- SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped • Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start cated in the center of the menu bar of the (Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using radio touchscreen. This is where you can the Uconnect App from your device. You 8.4–inch Display) manage your Apps. can also do so by logging into your owner site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and WARNING! when your vehicle has an operable network Uconnect Phone buttons are located on connection. Services can only be used the left side of your steering wheel. These ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- where coverage is available. buttons let you use your voice to give tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have • Receive text or email notifications if your commands, make phone calls, send and full responsibility and assume all risks vehicle's security alarm goes off. receive text messages, enter navigation destinations, and control your radio and related to the use of the features and • Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using applications in this vehicle. Only use the GPS technology to help authorities locate media devices. features and applications when it is safe to your vehicle if it is stolen. Included Trial Period For New Vehicles do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. • Get operator assistance using the ASSIST Your new vehicle may come with an included button on your interior rearview mirror. trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian NOTE: Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the services starting at the date of vehicle pur- Your vehicle may be transmitting data as easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services. chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica- authorized by the subscriber. 1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership located on your rearview mirror. The AS- must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af- and driving experience. When connected to SIST button is used for contacting Road- ter the trial period, if you wish to continue an operable network, you can: side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM your SiriusXM Guardian services you can Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The choose to purchase a subscription. SOS Call button connects you to a 227 NOTE: • Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys- hundreds of miles away. tem and device compatibility. • Find your vehicle, no matter where you SiriusXM Guardian Activation parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder function. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate • Use Send & Go to send a navigation route MULTIMEDIA your SiriusXM Guardian services. from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s navigation system. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen. For further information:. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from • U.S. residents visit: your list of apps. www.siriusxm.com/guardian 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a • Canadian residents visit: SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent www.siriusxm.ca/guardian Mobile App who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the Download The Uconnect App To use the Uconnect App: web. You’re only a few steps away from using • Search for and download the Uconnect App from the store on your compatible iPhone or Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are remote commands and other valuable ser- Android powered device. just a few examples of things you’ll be able to vices. do: • Log in to the app using the email address and password you created when you acti- • Know that help, if you need it, is only a vated the services. button press away with Assist.

228 • Press the “Remote” button on the bottom Maintaining YourSiriusXM Guardian WARNING! menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re- Account mote Start (if equipped), and activate your • ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- Selling Your Vehicle horn and lights remotely. tion to the road. Some features are lim- • Press the “Location” button on the bottom When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some menu bar of the app to bring up a map to you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account services, including SOS, will NOT work locate your vehicle or send a location to information from the vehicle. You can do this by without a subscription and an operable your vehicle’s navigation system. pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and network connection. • Press the menu button (three horizontal selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call: • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could lines) in the upper left corner of the app to mean you may not have SOS Call service • U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827 access settings and support information. if needed. If the rearview mirror light is • Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091 illuminated, have an authorized dealer Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C service the SOS Call system immedi- NAV With 8.4-inch Display) Built-In Features ately. • The Occupant Restraint Controller Subscriptions can be purchased online by log- (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning ging into your owner account. If you need help WARNING! Light on the instrument panel if a mal- push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on function is detected in any part of the then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or: the wheel. You have full responsibility and airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning • U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827 assume all risks related to the use of the Light is illuminated, the air bag system Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian • Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091 may not be working properly and the services, and applications in this vehicle. SOS Call system may not send a signal to Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM a SOS Call operator if an air bag is Guardian services when it is safe to do so. deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is Failure to do so may result in an accident illuminated, have an authorized dealer involving serious injury or death. service your vehicle immediately.

229 NOTE: nected to someone who can help any- WARNING! Your vehicle may be transmitting data as time. Additional fees may apply. Addi- • If anyone in the vehicle could be in authorized by the subscriber. tional information in this section. danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), 1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped — • Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for do not wait for voice contact from a SOS The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST Uconnect Apps and Features. button, allowing you to speak to a call Call operator. All occupants should exit • SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle MULTIMEDIA center agent for support: the vehicle immediately and move to a support for SiriusXM Guardian ser- safe location. vices. • The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not • Vehicle Care — Total support for your add aftermarket electrical equipment to FCA US LLC vehicle. the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a sig- NOTE: nal to initiate an emergency call. To In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser- avoid interference that can cause the vices to you, we may record and monitor your SOS Call system to fail, never add after- conversations with Roadside Assistance, market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to Assist And SOS Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser- your vehicle’s electrical system or 1 — SOS Button modify the antennas on your vehicle. 2 — ASSIST Button vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a • IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY landline device, and may share information POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD- obtained through such recording and moni- ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- • Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a toring in accordance with regulatory require- DENT), the Uconnect features, apps, flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con- ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent and SiriusXM Guardian services, among to any recording, monitoring or sharing of others, will not operate. information obtained through any such call recordings. 230 2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The on the line, even after you connect with will ask for the stolen vehicle report num- rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but- emergency services. The Emergency ser- ber issued by local law enforcement. As ton that, when pressed, may place a call vices operator may, like any other emer- long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM Guard- from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian gency call, record conversations and ian subscription and an operable network Care operator, who can connect you to sounds in and near your vehicle upon connection, the agent may be able to emergency service operators, to request connection. locate the stolen vehicle and work with help from local police, fire or ambulance 3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped — law enforcement to help recover it. Your personnel. If this button is accidentally The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti- vehicle must have an operable network pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop fies you via email or text (SMS) message connection and must be registered with the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu- SiriusXM Guardian with an active sub- button again or press the “Cancel” button rity alarm system has been triggered. scription that includes the applicable shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec- There are a number of reasons why your feature. alarm may have been triggered, one of onds has passed, the SOS call will be 5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows which could be that your vehicle was sto- placed and only the SOS Call operator can you and your passengers to connect their len. If so, please see the details of the cancel it. The LED light on the rearview portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi mirror will turn green once a connection to Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When activated, Theft Alarm Notification capabilities of your Uconnect system. a SOS Call operator has been made. The Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the green LED light will turn off once the SOS is automatically set to send you an email at the email address you provide should use of an Internet-enabled portable Call is terminated. Have an authorized device. dealer service the vehicle if the rearview the alarm go off. You may also opt to have mirror light is continuously red. On a text message sent to your device. NOTE: equipped vehicles, this feature requires a 4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle Uconnect offers a complimentary functioning electrical system, a subscrip- is stolen, contact local law enforcement 3–month trial period that includes 1GB of tion, and an operable network connection. immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. total data. The trial can be activated any If a connection is made between a SOS Call Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM time within the first year of new vehicle operator and your vehicle, you understand Guardian Care can help locate your ve- ownership. and agree that SOS Call operators will stay hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent 231 a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box NOTE: Canadian residents - visit should be un-checked. Your vehicle must have a working electrical UconnectPhone.com or call: b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM 1-800-465-2001 (English) or from the toushcreeen to locate your Guardian services to operate. call:1-800-387-9983 (French). Hotspot Name and Password. Make SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature note of this information. provides the ability to start the engine on your

MULTIMEDIA If you own a compatible iPhone or Android c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the vehicle, without the keys and from virtually powered device, the Uconnect App allows main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check any distance. You can send a request to your you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot. vehicle in one of two ways: start your engine or activate your horn and d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set- lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- tings menu, select the Hotspot Name must be equipped with remote start, must ible device. from the list of available networks and have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. enter the provided Password. must have an operable network connection. • After 15 minutes if you have not en- Services can only be used where coverage is e. Open the web browser on your por- tered your vehicle with the key, the available. You can download the App from table device and enter the following engine will shut off automatically. web address: Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login. (iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit • You can also send a command to turn- UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de- off an engine that has been remote f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus- started. your existing one. tomer support and to determine if your device • This remote function requires your ve- is compatible. g. Select and purchase the desired sub- hicle to be equipped with a factory- scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or installed Remote Start system. To uti- will activate after a few minutes. call 1-877-855-8400. lize this feature after the Uconnect App For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus- is downloaded, login with your user tomer Care at: 866-595-1330. name and password. 232 You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard- 3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on lights. It may also help if you need to draw ian Security PIN to confirm the request. the phone. attention to your vehicle for any reason. You Press the “remote start” icon on your can send a request to your vehicle in one of To use this feature after the Uconnect App is Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle. three ways: downloaded, login using your user name and You can set-up notifications for your account password. You will need your four digit 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- to receive an email or text (SMS) message SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm ible device. every time a command is sent. Login to the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM press the “open lock” icon to unlock the on the phone. Guardian Notifications. driver’s door. To use this feature after the Uconnect App is Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped — You can set-up notifications for your account downloaded, login using your user name and This feature provides the ability to lock or to receive an email or text (SMS) message password. You will need your four digit unlock the door on your vehicle, without the every time a command is sent. Login to SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm keys and from virtually any distance. You can Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and the request. You can set-up notifications for send a request to your vehicle in one of three click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM your account to receive an email or text ways: Guardian Notifications. (SMS) message every time a command is 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at ible device. easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man- 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. noisy parking area by activating the horn and age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.

233 Vehicle Finder To send a navigation route to your vehicle: The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile App allows you to find the location of Mobile App bottom bar. your vehicle when you can't remember where 2. Either type in the destination you would it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and like to navigate to, or search through one flash the lights to make finding your vehicle of the categories provided.

MULTIMEDIA even easier. 3. Select the destination you want to route to To find your vehicle: from the list that appears. 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect 4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and Mobile App bottom bar. then confirm the destination by pressing 2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine “Yes,” to send the navigation route to the the location of your vehicle. Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. 3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap- 5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve- pears, once your vehicle is located. hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on the pop-up that appears on the touch- 4. Select your preferred Navigation App to screen, when the vehicle is started. route a path to your vehicle. Send & Go The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile App allows you to search for a destination on your mobile device and then send the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga- tion system.

234 UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons 1 — RADIO Button 6 — SCREEN OFF Button 2 — COMPASS Button 7 — MUTE Button 3 — SETTINGS Button 8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob 4 — MORE Functions Button 9 — Uconnect PHONE Button 5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob 10 — MEDIA Button

235 NOTE: the front and rear or right and left side speak- CAUTION! In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select ers. Press the Center “C” button on the Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to doing so can result in damage to the touch- display in the status bar on or off. the factory setting. screen. Audio Setting Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped 1. Press the “Settings” button on the Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button

MULTIMEDIA Clock Setting faceplate. on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1, To start the clock setting procedure: 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume 2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. 1. Press the Settings button on the face- on the touchscreen to open the Audio plate, then press the “Clock and Date” menu. Loudness — If Equipped button. 3. The Audio Menu shows the following op- Press the “Loudness” button on the touch- 2. Press the “Set Time” button on the tions for you to customize your audio screen to select the Loudness feature. When touchscreen. settings. this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes. 3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to ad- Equalizer just the hours or minutes, then select the Surround Sound — If Equipped Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- “AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen. screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble. Press the “Surround Sound” button on the You can also select 12hr or 24hr format Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen touchscreen, select On or Off followed by by pressing the desired button on the to adjust the equalizer to your desired set- pressing the back arrow button on the touch- touchscreen. tings. screen. When this feature is activated, it provides simulated surround sound mode. 4. Once the time is set press the “Done” Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to exit the time screen. Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from 236 Radio Operation the “All” button on the touchscreen on the You can reply to the message using Voice radio home screen displays all of the preset Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of stations for that mode. the 18 pre-defined messages. To store a radio preset manually, follow the Here’s How: steps below: 1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR) 1. Tune to the desired station. and Phone button and wait for the beep, then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the fol- 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- lowing prompt: “Please say the message ton on the touchscreen for more than two you would like to send.” seconds, or until you hear a confirmation 2. Wait for the beep and say one of the beep. pre-defined messages. (If you are not Radio Operation Seek Next/Previous Buttons sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages 1 — Radio Sta- 5 — Station In- • Press the Seek up or Seek down button to tion Preset formation seek through radio stations in AM, FM or allowed. 2 — All Presets 6 — Direct Tune SXM bands. 3. As soon as you hear the message you 3 — Seek Next 7 — Radio Band would like to send, you can interrupt the • Hold either button to bypass stations with- 4—Audio Set- 8 — Seek Previ- list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect out stopping. tings ous phone button and saying the phrase. Voice TextReply (Not Compatible With Uconnect will confirm the message by iPhone) reading it back to you. Store Radio Presets Manually 4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.” Once your Uconnect system is paired with a The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of compatible mobile device, the system can the Radio modes. There are four visible pre- announce a new incoming text message, and sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing read it to you over the vehicle audio system.

237 system is designed to keep your eyes on the PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES CAUTION! Stuck in traf- road and your hands on the wheel by letting Yes. See you later. fic. Siri help you perform useful tasks. Do NOT attach any object to the touch- Start without screen, doing so can result in damage to No. I’ll be late. To enable Siri push and hold, then release the me. the screen. Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on I will be <5, Where are the steering wheel. After you hear a double Okay. 10, 15, 20, NOTE:

MULTIMEDIA you? beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and 25, 30, 45, Uconnect screen images are for illustration Are you there music, get directions, read text messages Call me. 60>* min- purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- yet? utes late. and many other useful requests. ware for your vehicle. I’ll call you I need direc- See you in later. tions. <5, 10, 15, UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH Setting The Time 20, 25, 30, I’m on my 45, 60>* • For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then Can’t talk DISPLAY way. minutes. right now. press the time display at the top of the I’m lost. Thanks. Uconnect 4 At A Glance screen. Press “Yes.” • If the time is not displayed at the top of the *Use only the numbering listed or the system screen, press the “Settings” button on the may not transcribe the message properly. touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option. Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and • If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box. responds back to confirm your requests. The Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Screen • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen. 238 Audio Settings • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- AUX Volume Offset screen, or press and drag over the level bar • Press the “Audio” button on the touch- • Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on for each of the equalizer bands. The level screen to activate the Audio settings screen the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol- value, which spans between plus or minus to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–” Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud- the bands. ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and buttons. This alters the AUX input audio Radio Off With Door. Speed Adjusted Volume volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button • You can return to the Radio screen by above the adjustment bar. pressing the “X” located at the top right. on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- Auto Play — If Equipped Balance/Fade justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the • Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch- volume level indicator. This alters the auto- • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The matic adjustment of the audio volume with touchscreen to Balance audio between the Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and variation to vehicle speed. front speakers or fade the audio between “Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins the rear and front speakers. Loudness — If Equipped playing from a connected device, immediately after it is connected to the radio. • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or • Press the “On” button on the touchscreen “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac- Auto On Radio — If Equipped tivate this feature. When Loudness is On, press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust • The Radio automatically turns on when the sound quality at lower volumes the Balance/Fade. vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was improves. Equalizer on or off at last ignition off. • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.

239 Radio Off With Door — If Equipped 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the • Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on main menu bar. the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door The new app shortcut, that was dragged feature, when activated, keeps the radio on down onto the main menu bar, will now until the driver or passenger door is opened, be an active App/shortcut.

MULTIMEDIA or when the Radio Off Delay selected time NOTE: has expired. This feature is only available if the vehicle is Drag&DropMenuBar in PARK. The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.

240 Radio

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 6 — Seek Up 2 — Toggle Between Presets 7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 3 — Status Bar 8 — Seek Down 4 — Main Category Bar 9 — Browse And Manage Presets 5 — Audio Settings 10 — Radio Bands

241 • Press and hold either arrow button on the Android Auto — If Equipped WARNING! touchscreen for more than two seconds to NOTE: ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on bypass stations without stopping. The radio Feature availability depends on your carrier the wheel. You have full responsibility and will stop at the next listenable station once assume all risks related to the use of the the arrow button on the touchscreen is and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian released. Android Auto features may or may not be services, and applications in this vehicle. available in every region and/or language. MULTIMEDIA Direct Tune Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect Guardian services when it is safe to do so. system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or Failure to do so may result in an accident the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- higher, powered smartphone with a data involving serious injury or death. tering the desired station number. plan, that allows you to project your smart- Store Radio Presets Manually • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- phone and a number of its apps onto the dio” button on the touchscreen. Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au- 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They tomatically brings you useful information, Selecting Radio Stations are shown at the top of your radio screen. To and organizes it into simple cards that appear • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or see the 12 preset stations per band, press the just when they are needed. Android Auto can SXM) button on the touchscreen. arrow button on the touchscreen at the top be used with Google's best-in-class speech right of the screen to toggle between the two technology, the steering wheel controls, the Seek Up/Seek Down sets of six presets. knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on To store a radio preset manually, follow the and the radio display’s touchscreen to control the touchscreen for less than two seconds steps below: many of your apps. To use Android Auto to seek through radio stations. 1. Tune to the desired station. follow the following steps: 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- 1. Download the Android Auto app from the ton on the touchscreen for more than two Google Play store on your Android- seconds or until you hear a confirmation powered smartphone. beep. 242 2. Connect your Android powered smart- 3. Once the device is connected and recog- phone to one of the media USB ports in nized, Android Auto should automatically your vehicle. If you have not downloaded launch, but you can also launch it by the Android Auto app to your smartphone touching the Android Auto icon on the before plugging in the device for the first touchscreen, located under Apps. time, the app begins to download. Once Android Auto is up and running on your NOTE: Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone’s data Be sure to use the factory-provided USB plan: cable that came with your phone, as af- Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage termarket cables may not work. • Google Maps for navigation Your phone may ask you to approve the • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, NOTE: use of the Android Auto app before use. etc. for music Requires compatible smartphone running • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down- nication load app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and Google Play are trademarks of • Hundred of compatible apps, and many Google Inc. more! Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped NOTE: To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an NOTE: area with cellular coverage. Android Auto Feature availability depends on your carrier may use cellular data and your cellular cov- and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple erage is shown in the upper right corner of the CarPlay features may or may not be available Android Auto radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a in every region and/or language. connection through USB, Android Auto will also connect via Bluetooth. 243 Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car- Play, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple

MULTIMEDIA Music, Maps, Messages, and more. To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the Once CarPlay is up and running on your NOTE: very first connection only, and then use the Uconnect system, the following features can Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for following procedure: be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media • Phone Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. USB ports in your vehicle. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. • Music NOTE: iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- • Messages Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- tered in the US and other countries. Apple ning cable that came with your phone, as • Maps terms of use and privacy statements apply. aftermarket cables may not work. NOTE: 2. Once the device is connected and recog- To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is nized, CarPlay should automatically turned on, and that you are in an area with launch, but you can also launch it by cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- touching the CarPlay icon on the touch- erage is shown on the left side of the radio screen, located under Apps. screen.

244 UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV • If the time is not displayed at the top of the WARNING! screen, press the “Settings” button on the WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY Failure to do so may result in an accident touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press involving serious injury or death. the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance then check or uncheck this option. CAUTION! • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. Do NOT attach any object to the touch- • If these features are not available, uncheck screen, doing so can result in damage to the Sync Time box. the screen. • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out NOTE: of the Clock Setting screen. Uconnect screen images are for illustration Background Themes purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. • Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio Setting The Time like to set a theme, follow the instructions • Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati- below. WARNING! cally via GPS, so it should not require any • Press the “Settings” button on the touch- time adjustment. If you do need to set the screen and select the display menu. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on time manually, follow the instructions be- the wheel. You have full responsibility and • Then press “Set Theme” button on the assume all risks related to the use of the low for Model 4C NAV. touchscreen and select a theme. Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian • For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then services, and applications in this vehicle. press the time display at the top of the Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM screen. Press “Yes.” Guardian services when it is safe to do so.

245 Audio Settings Speed Adjusted Volume 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the • Press the “Audio” button on the touch- • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button App screen. screen to activate the Audio settings screen on the touchscreen to activate the Speed 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- App to replace an existing shortcut in the Speed Adjusted Volume. justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the main menu bar. volume level indicator. This alters the auto- • You can return to the Radio screen by The new app shortcut, that was dragged MULTIMEDIA pressing the “X” located at the top right. matic adjustment of the audio volume with down onto the main menu bar, will now variation to vehicle speed. Balance/Fade be an active App/shortcut. Drag&DropMenuBar • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the NOTE: touchscreen to Balance audio between the The Uconnect features and services in the This feature is only available if the vehicle is front speakers or fade the audio between main menu bar are easily changed for your in PARK. the rear and front speakers. convenience. Simply follow these steps: • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. Equalizer • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen. • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch value, which spans between plus or minus Display Main Menu nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. 246 Radio

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings 2 — Toggle Between Presets 8 — Seek Up 3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down 5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets 6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands

247 • Press and hold either arrow button on the HD Radio — If Equipped WARNING! touchscreen for more than two seconds to • HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C bypass stations without stopping. The radio ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on NAV) operates similar to conventional radio will stop at the next listenable station once the wheel. You have full responsibility and except it allows broadcasters to transmit a the arrow button on the touchscreen is assume all risks related to the use of the high-quality digital signal. Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian released. services, and applications in this vehicle. • With an HD radio receiver, the listener is MULTIMEDIA Direct Tune Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM provided with a clear sound that enhances Guardian services when it is safe to do so. • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the listening experience. HD radio can also Failure to do so may result in an accident the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- transmit data such as song title or artist. involving serious injury or death. tering the desired station number. Android Auto — If Equipped Store Radio Presets Manually • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- NOTE: dio” button on the touchscreen. Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They Feature availability depends on your carrier Selecting Radio Stations are shown at the top of your radio screen. To and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or see the 12 preset stations per band, press the available in every region and/or language. SXM) button on the touchscreen. arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between the two Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect Seek Up/Seek Down sets of six presets. system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on To store a radio preset manually, follow the higher, powered smartphone with a data the touchscreen for less than two seconds steps below: plan, that allows you to project your smart- to seek through radio stations. phone and a number of its apps onto the 1. Tune to the desired station. touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au- 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- tomatically brings you useful information, ton on the touchscreen for more than two and organizes it into simple cards that appear seconds or until you hear a confirmation just when they are needed. Android Auto can beep. be used with Google's best-in-class speech 248 technology, the steering wheel controls, the Once Android Auto is up and running on your knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, Uconnect system, the following features can and the radio display’s touchscreen to control be utilized using your smartphone’s data many of your apps. To use Android Auto plan: follow these steps: • Google Maps for navigation 1. Download the Android Auto app from the • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, Google Play store on your Android- etc. for music powered smartphone. • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- 2. Connect your Android powered smart- nication phone to one of the media USB ports in Android Auto • Hundred of compatible apps, and many your vehicle. If you have not downloaded 3. Once Android Auto has made a connec- more! the Android Auto app to your smartphone tion through USB, Android Auto will also before plugging in the device for the first connect via Bluetooth. The system dis- NOTE: time, the app begins to download. plays the Android Auto home screen. To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto NOTE: Android Auto automatically launches, but if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own- may use cellular data and your cellular cov- Be sure to use the factory-provided USB er’s Manual Supplement for the procedure erage is shown in the upper right corner of the cable that came with your phone, as af- to enable the feature “AutoShow.” You radio screen. termarket cables may not work. can also launch it by pressing Android Your phone may ask you to approve the Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you use of the Android Auto app before use. use Android Auto frequently you can move the app to the menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button and locate the Android Auto app; then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. 249 NOTE: NOTE: If the VR button is not held, and is only If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi- pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts gation system, and you try and start a new you and any spoken navigation command route using Android Auto, via voice or any launches the built-in Uconnect navigation other method, a pop-up appears asking if you system. would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-

MULTIMEDIA tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro- appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if vides voice-guided: Android Auto is currently in use and you • Navigation attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route. Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage • Live traffic information Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly used method of navigation and a NOTE: • Lane guidance Requires compatible smartphone running route is planned for the new destination. If Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down- “No” is selected the navigation type remains load app on Google Play. Android, Android unchanged. Auto and Google Play are trademarks of For further information, refer to Google Inc. www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or Maps https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canadian Residents). Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask For further information on the navigation Google to take you to a desired destination by function, please refer to voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon Google Maps https://support.google.com/android or in Android Auto to access Google Maps. https://support.google.com/androidauto/.

250 Music For further information refer to https://support.google.com/androidauto. Android Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google Play Communication Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end- With Android Auto connected, press and hold less music on the road. the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to the Android NOTE: Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to For music apps, playlists, and stations to text messages, have incoming text messages work with Android Auto, they must be set up read out loud, and place and receive hands- Android Auto Phone on your smartphone before using Android free calls. Auto. Apps The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto. Android Auto Contact Android Auto Music

NOTE: To see the metadata for the music playing through Android Auto, select the Uconnect System’s media screen. 251 Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped 2. Once the device is connected, the system Once CarPlay is up and running on your displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple Uconnect system, the following features can NOTE: CarPlay automatically launches, but if be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: Feature availability depends on your carrier not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s • Phone and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple Manual Supplement for the procedure to CarPlay features may or may not be available enable the feature “AutoShow.” You can • Music in every region and/or language.

MULTIMEDIA also launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon • Messages Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car- located in the “Apps” menu. If you use • Maps Play, the smarter, more secure way to use Apple CarPlay frequently you can move your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the app to the menu bar at the bottom of NOTE: the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and turned on, and that you are in an area with your voice with Siri to get access to Apple drop the selected App to replace an exist- cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- Music, Maps, Messages, and more. ing shortcut in the main menu bar. erage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure: 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- CarPlay ning cable that came with your phone, as CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage aftermarket cables may not work. 252 NOTE: Music Maps Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select and hold the VR button on the steering wheel Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. third party audio apps including music, news, to use Siri to set your desired destination. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- sports, podcasts and more. Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by tered in the US and other countries. Apple pressing Destinations and selecting a cat- terms of use and privacy statements apply. egory, by launching Siri from the destinations Phone page, or even by typing in a destination. With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within CarPlay to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone. Apple Music

NOTE: Messages Only temporarily pushing the VR button on Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to Maps the steering wheel launches a built-in VR use Siri to send or reply to text messages. session, not a Siri session, and it will not NOTE: Since everything is done by voice, Siri can function with CarPlay. also read incoming text messages do you • If the VR button is not held, and is only don’t have to. pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system. 253 • If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi- Apps screen. When making a selection, scroll up or gation system, and you try and start a new down until the preferred setting is high- To use an app that is compatible with Car- route using CarPlay, via voice or any other lighted, then press the preferred setting until method, a pop-up appears asking if you Play, you must have the compatible app al- a check-mark appears next to the setting, would like to switch from Uconnect naviga- ready downloaded to your iPhone and you showing that setting has been selected. The tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also must also be signed in. Refer to http:// following feature settings are available: appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents) • Display • Engine Off Options MULTIMEDIA CarPlay navigation is currently in use and or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect (Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of • Units • Audio route. Selecting “Yes” switches the naviga- available apps for CarPlay. •Voice—If • Phone/Bluetooth tion type to the newly used method of Equipped navigation and a route will be planned for UCONNECT SETTINGS • Clock & Date • SiriusXM Setup — the new destination. If “No” is selected the If Equipped navigation type remains unchanged. The Uconnect system allows you to access • Safety/Assistance • Radio Setup — If Customer Programmable feature settings Equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv- • Brakes — If • Restore Settings ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Equipped Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off • Lights • Clear Personal Data Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ • Doors & Locks Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Re- store Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Sys- NOTE: tem Information through buttons on the Depending on the vehicles options, feature touchscreen. settings may vary. Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 4), or Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- Navigation Pop-Up press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4C/4C dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- NAV) located near the bottom of the touch- mation. screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings 254 USB/MEDIA PLAYER Rear Center Console USB Port Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation sys- Located on the rear of the center console is a CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED tem. second USB port. This feature allows an external device to be Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt plugged into the USB port or AUX Jack. NOTE: Volume Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port may be charge only, or media file ca- Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume pable. 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower right area of the screen. 2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid- Front USB Port And AUX Jack ance” button on the touchscreen. 1 — USB Port 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav 2 — AUX Jack Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

Located below the heating ventilation and air Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only) conditioning controls is the front USB port Port — If Equipped and AUX jack. NAVIGATION — IF Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for external USB support capa- EQUIPPED bility. • The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display system.

255 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation 1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories 5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination 2 — Find A Destination 6 — Navigation Settings 3 — View Map 7 — Emergency 4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination 8 — Information

256 Finding Points Of Interest One-Step Voice Destination Entry • Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. You can add a Home location by • From the main Navigation menu, press the • Enter a navigation destination without tak- either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, ing your hands off the wheel. Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County then press the “Points of Interest” button • Just push the Uconnect Voice Command is automatically filled out based on your on the touchscreen. button on the steering wheel, wait for state. • Select a category and then a subcategory, if the beep and say something like, "Find • Once you have entered your Home location, necessary. Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills select the “Save Home” button located on • Select your destination and press the MI." the lower left-hand side of your touch- “GO!” button on the touchscreen. screen. NOTE: Finding A Place By Spelling The Name Using your touchscreens keyboard is not • To delete a saved Home location (or other available while your vehicle is in motion. saved locations), so you can save a new • From the Main Navigation Menu press the Home location, press the “Nav” button on However, you can also use Voice Commands “Where to?” button on the touchscreen, the touchscreen, and in the “Where To” to enter an address while moving. Refer to press the “Points of Interest” button on the screen, press “Edit Where To” and then touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name” “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in press the “Home” button on the touch- or “Search All” button on the touchscreen. this section for further information. screen. Under the Manage screen press the “Reset Location” button. A confirmation • Enter the name of your destination. Setting YourHome Location screen will appear asking if you “Are you • Press the “List” or “OK” button on the • To add a Home location, press the “Nav” sure you want to reset this location?” Press touchscreen. button on the touchscreen in the menu bar “Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new • Select your destination and press the to access the Navigation system and the Home location by following the previous “GO!” button on the touchscreen. Main Navigation menu. instructions.

257 Home • A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map 1 — Distance To Next Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map 2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu 3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location 4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options

258 Your route is marked with a blue line on the TakingA Detour mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, map. If you depart from the original route, determine average traffic speed and estimate • To take a detour you must be navigating a your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon travel time along your route. Since the service route. could appear as you travel on major roadways. is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys- • Press the “Detour” button on the Adding A Stop tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers touchscreen. pick the fastest route based on traffic condi- • To add a stop you must be navigating a tions. route. NOTE: If the route you are currently taking is the only • Detailed information on traffic speed, acci- • Press the “Menu” button on the touch- reasonable option, the device may not calcu- dents, construction, and road closings. screen to return to the Main Navigation late a detour. For more information, see your menu. • Traffic information from multiple sources, Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement. including police and emergency services, • Press the “Where To?” button on the touch- cameras and road sensors. screen, then search for the extra stop. SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With When another location has been selected, 8.4–inch Display) • Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa- you can choose to cancel your previous tion. route, add as the first destination or add as Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It. • View conditions for points along your route the last destination. Avoid congestion before you reach it. By and beyond. Available in over 130 markets. • Press the desired selection and press the enhancing your vehicle's navigation system “GO!” button on the touchscreen. with the ability to see detailed traffic infor-

259 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With mation arrives and updates in the back- 8.4–inch Display) ground. You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting. In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk, and To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre- “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch- mium data services that work in conjunction

MULTIMEDIA screen. with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful NOTE: information into your vehicle and right to your SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, fingertips. sold separately after the trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase. • Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station of your choice. • Movie Listings — Check local movie the- atres and listings in your area and route to the theater of your choice. • Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules. • Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps to current and 5-day forecast.

SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor- 260 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Call/Redial/Hold 7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 8 — Text Messaging 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 9 — Direct Dial Pad 4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 10 — Recent Call Log 5 — Mute Microphone 11 — Browse Phone Book 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 12 — End Call

261 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Favorite Contacts 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 12 — Browse Phone Book Entries 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 13 — End Call 4 — Siri 14 — Call/Redial/Hold 5 — Mute Microphone 15 — Do Not Disturb 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 16 — Reply with Text Message 7 — Conference Call* * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile de- 8 — Phone Settings vices 9 — Text Messaging** ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 10 — Direct Dial Pad (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

262 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 12 — Favorite Contacts 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 13 — Mute Microphone 3 — Do Not Disturb 14 — Decline Incoming Call 4 — Reply with Text Message** 15 — Answer/Redial/Hold 5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name 16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 6 — Conference Call* 17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 — Phone Pairing * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile de- 8 — Text Messaging Menu** vices 9 — Direct Dial Pad ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 10 — Contact Menu (requires Bluetooth MAP profile) 11 — Recent Call Log

263 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to • For Uconnect Customer Care: 2. Press the “Phone” button. place and receive hands-free mobile phone • U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or 3. Select “Settings.” calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone call 1-877-855-8400. calls using their voice or by using the buttons 4. Select “Paired Phones.” on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec- Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your 5. Select “Add device.” tion). Mobile Phone ToThe Uconnect System • Uconnect Phone will display an “In

MULTIMEDIA The hands-free calling feature is made pos- Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab- progress” screen while the system is sible through Bluetooth technology — the lishing a wireless connection between a cel- connecting. global standard that enables different elec- lular phone and the Uconnect system. tronic devices to connect to each other wire- Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display: lessly. Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display: your steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone features. NOTE: • The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands- Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. Uconnect 4 • Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON some mobile phones/devices may not be position. equipped with all of the required features 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar Uconnect 3 to utilize all of the Uconnect system fea- on the touchscreen. A message will dis- tures. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON play asking “No phone connected. Do you position. want to pair a phone?” Select Yes. 264 3. After selecting “Yes,” go through the • A message will display asking, “No Pair Your iPhone: steps to pair your phone using your Phone Connected. Would you like to Bluetooth connectivity. pair a phone?” Select Yes. After press- 4. Once pairing is successful, a message will ing Yes, the radio prompts will take you display asking, “Make this your Favorite?” through the steps to connect your Then select Yes or No. phone via Bluetooth. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display: • Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting. Once the pairing has been successful, a message will display “Bluetooth pairing successful: The device supports Phone and Audio.” Click “OK.” 3. Select “Settings.” 4. Select “Phone/Bluetooth,” and then se- Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device lect “Paired Phones and Audio Devices.” To search for available devices on your 5. The “Add Device” option will be listed Bluetooth enabled iPhone: Uconnect 4C/4C NAV under the “Paired Phones” section. 1. Press the Settings button. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON 2. Select Bluetooth. position. 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en- on the touchscreen. abled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections.

265 3. When your mobile phone finds the mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this To search for available devices on your Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. mobile phone the highest priority. This mo- Bluetooth enabled Android Device: bile phone will take precedence over other Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure: 1. Push the Menu button. paired mobile phones within range and will 2. Select Settings. connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one 3. Select Connections.

MULTIMEDIA mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.” device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ phone will begin to search for audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Bluetooth connections. Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. 5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. Pairing Request Pair Your Android Device: • You may be prompted by your mobile 1. When prompted on the mobile phone, phone to download the phonebook, accept the connection request from check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati- Uconnect Phone. cally download the phonebook. This is so you can make calls by saying the NOTE: name of your contact. Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number. Select The iPhone's Priority Level When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to Uconnect Device choose whether or not this is your favorite 266 Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority NOTE: Level Keep in mind that software updates – either on your phone or Uconnect system – may When the pairing process has successfully interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If completed, the system will prompt you to this happens, simply repeat the pairing pro- choose whether or not this is your favorite cess. However, first, make sure to delete the mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this device from the list of phones on your mobile phone the highest priority. This mo- Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove bile phone will take precedence over other Uconnect from the list of devices in your paired mobile phones within range and will phone’s Bluetooth settings. connect to the Uconnect system automati- You are now ready to make hands-free calls. cally when entering the vehicle. Only one Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio your steering wheel to begin. device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply NOTE: Pairing Request select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ Refer to UconnectPhone.com or audio device Bluetooth screen, and the www.DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or 1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile Uconnect system will reconnect to the www.DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi- phone matches the passkey shown on the Bluetooth device. dents) or an authorized dealer for additional Uconnect system then accept the information on mobile phone pairing and for Bluetooth pairing request. a list of compatible phones.

NOTE: Some mobile phones require the PIN to be entered manually, enter the PIN number shown on the Uconnect screen.

267 Common Phone Commands (Examples) Phonebook Voice Command Tips • “Call John Smith” The Uconnect system will automatically sync • Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John • “Call John Smith mobile” your phonebook from your paired phone, if Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater this feature is supported by your phone. system accuracy. • “Dial 1 248 555 1212” Phonebook contacts are updated each time • You can “link” commands together for • “Redial” that the phone is connected. Phonebook en- faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”

MULTIMEDIA tries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During for example. your phone book entries do not appear, check • If you are listening to available voice com- Call the settings on your phone. Some phones mand options, you do not have to listen to require you to enable this feature manually. • During a call, press the “Mute” button on the entire list. When you hear the command the Phone main screen, that appears only • Your phonebook can be browsed on the that you need, push the button on the when a call is in progress, to mute and Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing steering wheel, wait for the beep and say unmute the call. can only be done on your phone. To browse, your command. Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on Changing The Volume And Vehicle the touchscreen. • Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button • During an on-going call, press the “Trans- Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as , then say a command. For example, fer” button on the Phone main screen to Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are "Help". transfer an on-going call between handset shown in the Favorites menu. • Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob and vehicle. to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Uconnect system is speaking.

268 NOTE: To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing” • Reply with text message is not compatible The volume setting for Uconnect is different on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not with iPhones. Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can than the audio system. • Auto reply with text message is only avail- also activate it using the “Do Not Disturb” able on phones that supporting Bluetooth NOTE: button at the top of every Phone screen. To access help, push the VR button on the MAP. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR text message, a call or both, when declining Incoming TextMessages button and say "cancel" to cancel the help an incoming call and send it to voicemail. session. After pairing your Uconnect system with a Automatic reply messages can be: Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Using Do Not Disturb Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect • “I am driving right now, I will get back to With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi- you shortly.” system can announce a new incoming text cations from incoming calls and texts, allow- message and read it to you over the vehicle’s • Create a custom auto reply message up to audio system. ing you to keep your eyes on the road and 160 characters. hands on the wheel. For your convenience, To listen to incoming text messages, or any there is a counter display to keep track of your While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can messages currently on the mobile phone, be selected so you can still place a second missed calls and text messages while you select the “Messages” menu and press the call without being interrupted by incoming were using Do Not Disturb. “Listen” button next to the message you want calls. to listen to. NOTE: NOTE: • Only the beginning of your custom message Only incoming text messages received during will be seen on the touchscreen. the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.

269 To Enable Incoming Text Messaging: • A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to con- iPhone nect to your messages. Select “Don’t 1. Press the settings button on the mobile ask again” and press OK. phone. 2. Select Bluetooth.

MULTIMEDIA • Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect system. 3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect. 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages

Android Devices 1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone. Enable Android Device Incoming Text Messages 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.

270 NOTE: manufacturer’s instructions), and follow Mobile Phonebook didn’t download: “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mo- All incoming text messages received during • Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the bile Phone To The Uconnect System”. the current ignition cycle will be deleted from “phonebook download” request on your the Uconnect system when the ignition is • Perform a factory reset on your mobile mobile phone. turned to the OFF position. phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instruc- • Up to 5,000 contact names with four num- Helpful Tips And Common Questions To tions. This should only be done as a last bers per contact will transfer to the Improve Bluetooth Performance With resort. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook. YourUconnect System Mobile Phone won’t pair to system: • Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after • Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect 4 system phonebook. pairing: Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s Can’t make a conference call: • Set mobile phone to auto-connect or Bluetooth connection settings. trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth • Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the • CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car- settings (Blackberry devices). discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo- riers do not support conference calling. bile phone. Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual • Many mobile phones do not automatically for further information. reconnect after being restarted (hard re- • If your vehicle system generates a pin code boot). Your mobile phone can still be con- the default is 0000. Making calls while connected to AUX: nected manually. Close all applications that • Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by • Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while may be operating (refer to mobile phone removing the battery (if removable — see connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands- your mobile phone’s owner manual). This Free Calling. Do not make calls while your should only be done as a last resort. mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.

271 UCONNECT VOICE Get Started RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steer- Introducing Uconnect ing wheel. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: these helpful quick tips. It provides the key MULTIMEDIA 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo- Voice Commands and tips you need to know bile device and feature compatibility and to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4 to find phone pairing instructions. Uconnect 4/4C NAV system. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you Uconnect 4C NAV must first push either the Voice Recogni- Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio tion (VR) or Phone button, wait until after Visual Cues If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or the beep, then say your Voice Command. in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touch- 5. You can interrupt the help message or screen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV sys- system prompts by pushing the VR or tem. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with Phone button and saying a Voice Com- 8.4-inch display system. mand from current category.

272 Basic Voice Commands TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push The basic Voice Commands below can be the VR button and say “Help.” The given at any point while using your Uconnect system provides you with a list of commands. system. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: •“Cancel” to stop a current voice session •“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands •“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Uconnect Voice Command Buttons voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap- Uconnect 3 Radio pear on the touchscreen. 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text Radio 2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Ra- dio, Media, or Climate Functions. For Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or 8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would Navigation Function like to hear. (Subscription or included 3 — Push To End Call SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Uconnect 4 Radio •“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” •“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

273 •“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great- est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match MULTIMEDIA exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. Uconnect 4 Media Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio

Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Uconnect 3 Media Push the VR button . After the beep, say Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or Phone choose an artist. Making and answering hands-free phone •“Change source to Bluetooth” calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone- book button is illuminated on your touch- •“Change source to AUX” •“Change source to USB” 274 screen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Push the VR button and the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the following commands: •“Call John Smith” •“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts” Uconnect 3 Phone Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone •“Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)” Voice TextReply •“Call back (call previous incoming phone Uconnect announces incoming text mes- number)” sages. Push the Phone button and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push phone paired to Uconnect system.) the VR button and the Phone button and 1. Once an incoming text message is read to say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly you, push the Phone button . After as it appears in your phone book. When a Uconnect 4 Phone the beep, say: “Reply.” contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”

275 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the Push the VR button . After the beep, say beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes- one of the following commands: sages and follow the system prompts. •“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES •“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” Stuck in traf- Yes. See you later. fic. TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be

MULTIMEDIA Start without No. I’ll be late. used to adjust the interior temperature of me. your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to Where are Okay. iPhone Notification Settings adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if you? I will be equipped. Are you there 1 — Select “Settings” Call me. minutes late. yet? 2 — Select “Bluetooth” I’ll call you I need direc- 3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Ve- later. tions. See you in hicle of 4 — Turn On “Show Notifications” I’m on my minutes. way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. Thanks. TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send implementation of the Message Access Pro- a text message. file (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate For details about MAP, visit Climate UconnectPhone.com. Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera- Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort- incoming text messages only. To enable this able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these is equipped with climate control.) four simple steps: 276 An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.

NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the con- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Display Climate Canada. Services can only be used where SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If coverage is available; see coverage map for Navigation (4C NAV) Equipped details. The Uconnect navigation feature helps you SOS Call save time and become more productive when CAUTION! you know exactly how to get to where you Theft Alarm Notification Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ- want to go. ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call Remote Door Lock/Unlock 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button will NOT work without an operable LTE Send & Go . After the beep, say: “Find address (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, connection compatible with your device. Vehicle Finder Michigan.” NOTE: Stolen Vehicle Assistance 2. Then follow the system prompts. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as Remote Vehicle Start** TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR but- authorized by the subscriber. Remote Horn & Lights ton . After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.” Roadside Assistance Call 277 Vehicle Health Reports** Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) Vehicle Health Alert** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email Performance Pages Plus** report, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on **If vehicle is equipped. top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if Register (4C/4C NAV) you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. MULTIMEDIA Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Alerts when it detects issues with its key Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate systems that need your attention. For further your SiriusXM Guardian services. information, refer to your owner’s manual. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen. Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) 2. Select the Activate Services icon from You’re only a few steps away from using your list of apps. remote commands and sending a destination Mobile App from your phone to your vehicle. 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a To use the Uconnect Mobile App: SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent • Once you have registered your SiriusXM who will activate services in your vehicle, Guardian services, download the Uconnect or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web. App to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the • U.S. residents visit: app. www.siriusxm.com/guardian. • Once on the “Remote” screen, you can • Canadian residents visit: begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re- www.siriusxm.ca/guardian. mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.

278 • Press the “Location” button on the bottom TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with music, get directions, read text messages and menu bar of the app to bring up a map to Voice Command. many other useful requests. locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder and Send & Go , if equipped. • Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings. NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). SiriusXM Travel Link

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped Need to find a gas station, view local movie Siri lets you use your voice to send text listings, check a sports score or the5-day messages, select media, place phone calls weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a and much more. Siri uses your natural lan- suite of services that brings a wealth of infor- guage to understand what you mean and mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys- responds back to confirm your requests. The tem. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.) system is designed to keep your eyes on the Push the VR button . After the beep, say road and your hands on the wheel by letting Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri one of the following commands: Siri help you perform useful tasks. Eyes Free Available •“Show fuel prices” To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button •“Show 5 - day weather forecast” on the steering wheel. After you hear a double •“Show extended weather” beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and 279 Using Do Not Disturb • Reply with text message is not compatible “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to with iPhones. activate Android’s VR, which recognizes With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi- natural voice commands, to use a list of your cations from incoming calls and texts, allow- • Auto reply with text message is only avail- smartphone’s features: ing you to keep your eyes on the road and able on phones that supporting Bluetooth hands on the wheel. For your convenience, MAP. • Maps there is a counter display to keep track of Android Auto — If Equipped • Music MULTIMEDIA your missed calls and text messages while • Phone you were using Do Not Disturb. NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier • Text Messages Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a and mobile phone manufacturer. Some text message, a call or both, when declining • Additional Apps Android Auto features may or may not be an incoming call and send it to voicemail. available in every region and/or language. Automatic reply messages can be: Android Auto allows you to use your voice to • “I am driving right now, I will get back to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech you shortly.” technology through your vehicle’s voice rec- • Create a custom auto reply message up to ognition system, and use your smartphone’s 160 characters. data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your be selected so you can still place a second Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of Android Auto On 7-inch Display call without being interrupted by incoming the media USB ports, using the factory- calls. provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your NOTE: “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin • Only the beginning of your custom message Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button will be seen on the touchscreen. on the steering wheel, or press and hold the 280 Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Supplement for further information. “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice NOTE: commands to use a list of your iPhone’s Requires compatible smartphone running features: Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android • Phone Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of • Music Google Inc. • Messages Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display Apple CarPlay — If Equipped • Maps Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information. NOTE: • Additional Apps Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. 281 NOTE: 2. This device must accept any interference Uconnect System Support: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for received, including interference that may • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. cause undesired operation. call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. 7 days a week) Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. NOTE: iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca tered in the US and other countries. Apple proved by the party responsible for compli- or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or MULTIMEDIA terms of use and privacy statements apply. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 1-800-387-9983 (French) ate the equipment. General Information SiriusXM Guardian services support: Additional Information The following regulatory statement applies to • U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in © 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. or call: 1-844-796-4827 this vehicle: Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade- • Canadian residents visit This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade- www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or call: Rules and with Industry Canada license- mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark 1-877-324-9091 exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks ject to the following two conditions: and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .285 MOPARPARTS...... 286 SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . .284 In Mexico Contact ...... 285 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .286 Prepare For The Appointment...... 284 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .285 In The 50 United States And Washington, Prepare A List ...... 284 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or D.C...... 286 Be Reasonable With Requests ...... 284 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)...... 285 In Canada...... 287 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .284 Service Contract ...... 285 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .287 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 284 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .286

283 SUGGESTIONS FOR authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need talk to the general manager or owner of the OBTAINING SERVICE FOR a rental, it is advisable to make these ar- authorized dealer. They want to know if you YOUR VEHICLE rangements when you call for an appoint- need assistance. ment. Prepare For The Appointment • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufac- If you are having warranty work done, be sure IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE turer's customer center. to have the right papers with you. Take your The manufacturer and its authorized dealer warranty folder. All work to be performed may Any communication to the manufacturer's are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We not be covered by the warranty. Discuss ad- customer center should include the following want you to be happy with our products and ditional charges with the service manager. information: services. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's • Owner's name and address service history. This can often provide a clue Warranty service must be done by an autho- CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE • Owner's telephone number (home and of- to the current problem. rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you fice) Prepare A List take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most • Authorized dealer name Make a written list of your vehicle's problems concerned that you get prompt and high • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) or the specific work you want done. If you've quality service. The manufacturer's autho- had an accident or work done that is not on rized dealer have the facilities, factory- • Vehicle delivery date and mileage your maintenance log, let the service advisor trained technicians, special tools, and the FCA US LLC Customer Center know. latest information to ensure the vehicle is Be Reasonable With Requests fixed correctly and in a timely manner. P.O. Box 21–8004 If you list a number of items and you must This is why you should always talk to an Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 have your vehicle by the end of the day, authorized dealer service manager first. Most Phone: (877) 426-5337 discuss the situation with the service advisor matters can be resolved with this process. and list the items in order of priority. At many 284 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur- P.O. Box 1621 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) chased a manufacturer's service contract, Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 To assist customers who have hearing diffi- you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner culties, the manufacturer has installed spe- Identification Card in the mail within three Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the 387-9983 French weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any any questions about the service contract, call In Mexico Contact hearing or speech impaired customer, who the manufacturer's Service Contract National has access to a TDD or a conventional tele- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca- typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng- communicate with the manufacturer by dial- Sante Fe C.P. 05109 lish / (800) 387-9983 French). ing 1-800-380-CHRY. Mexico, D. F. The manufacturer will not stand behind any Canadian residents with hearing difficulties service contract that is not the manufactur- In Mexico City: 5081-7568 that require assistance can use the special er's service contract. It is not responsible for Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for any service contract other than the manufac- Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con- turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's FCA Caribbean LLC nect with a Bell Relay Service operator. service contract, and you require service after P.O. Box 191857 Service Contract the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War- San Juan 00919-1857 You may have purchased a service contract ranty expires, please refer to the contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high documents, and contact the person listed in Phone: (877) 426-5337 cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac- those documents. Fax: (787) 782-3345 turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.

285 We appreciate that you have made a major WARRANTY INFORMATION mediately inform the National High- investment when you purchased the vehicle. way Traffic Safety Administration See the Warranty Information Booklet for the An authorized dealer has also made a major (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA investment in facilities, tools, and training to terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran- assure that you are absolutely delighted with ties applicable to this vehicle and market. US LLC. the ownership experience. You will be If NHTSA receives similar complaints, pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve MOPAR PARTS it may open an investigation, and if it any warranty issues or related concerns. Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accesso- finds that a safety defect exists in a WARNING! ries are available from an authorized dealer. group of vehicles, it may order a recall They are recommended for your vehicle in and remedy campaign. However, Engine exhaust (internal combustion en- order to help keep the vehicle operating at its NHTSA cannot become involved in in- gines only), some of its constituents, and best. dividual problems between you, an au-

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of REPORTING SAFETY thorized dealer or FCA US LLC. California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at and certain products of component wear In The 50 United States And Washington, 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: contain, or emit, chemicals known to the D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// State of California to cause cancer and If you believe that your vehicle has a www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin- birth defects, or other reproductive harm. defect that could cause a crash or istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av- cause injury or death, you should im- enue, SE., West Building,

286 Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the obtain other information about motor page and select the “Contact Us” link, then vehicle safety from http:// select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. www.safercar.gov. You can also purchase a copy by calling In Canada 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). If you believe that your vehicle has a • Replacement User Guide kits or, if you safety defect, you should contact the prefer, additional printed copies of the Customer Service Department imme- Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio diately. Canadian customers who wish Manuals may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com or by calling to report a safety defect to the Cana- 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or dian government should contact 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De- Card, American Express and Discover or- fect Investigations and Recalls at ders are accepted. 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// NOTE: www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. • The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the PUBLICATION ORDER Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT FORMS websites. • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or “Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your Warranty Booklet. United States customers desired model year and vehicle from the may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at drop down lists.

287 288 INDEX

Accessories...... 221 Alarm Charging System Light ...... 60 Mopar ...... 221 Arm The System ...... 17 Belts, Seat ...... 120 Adding Fuel ...... 150 Disarm The System ...... 17 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 81 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 188 Security Alarm ...... 17, 62 B-Pillar Location ...... 196 Additives, Fuel...... 218 Android Auto ...... 242, 248, 280 Brake Assist System ...... 73 AirBag...... 99 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 219 Brake Control System, Electronic .....73 Advance Front Air Bag ...... 99 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 72 Brake Fluid...... 220 Air Bag Operation ...... 100 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 62, 65 Brakes...... 188 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 97 Apple CarPlay ...... 243, 252, 281 Brake System ...... 188 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 101 Assist, Hill Start...... 73 Fluid Check ...... 220 Enhanced Accident Response .105, 178 Audio Systems (Radio) ...... 237 Master Cylinder ...... 188 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 178 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 44 Warning Light ...... 59 Front Air Bag ...... 99 Automatic Headlights ...... 29 Bulbs, Light ...... 122 If Deployment Occurs ...... 104 Automatic High Beams ...... 29 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 101 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . .42 Camera, Rear ...... 145 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .107 Automatic Transmission...... 131, 189 Capacities, Fluid ...... 219 Maintenance ...... 107 Adding Fluid ...... 220 Caps, Filler Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . .98 Autostick ...... 133 Oil (Engine) ...... 185 Side Air Bags ...... 101 Fluid Level Check ...... 189 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 120 Transporting Pets ...... 119 Fluid Type ...... 220 Car Washes ...... 211 Air Bag Light...... 59, 97, 120 Auto Up Power Windows...... 44 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 163, 192 Air Conditioning Filter ...... 43 Axle Fluid...... 220 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 193 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 42 Axle Lubrication ...... 220 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Air Pressure Light) ...... 68 Tires ...... 201 Battery ...... 60, 189 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .119 289 Checks, Safety...... 119 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .255 Electric Parking Brake ...... 125 Child Restraint...... 108 Contract, Service ...... 285 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 73 Child Restraints Cooling System ...... 187 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)...... 78

INDEX Booster Seats ...... 110 Coolant Capacity ...... 219 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Child Restraints ...... 108 Coolant Level ...... 187 Control) ...... 137 Child Seat Installation ...... 117 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .219 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....74 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Cruise Light...... 66, 67 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.60 Belt ...... 115 Customer Assistance ...... 284 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Infants And Child Restraints .....109 Customer Programmable Features . . . .254 (EVIC) ...... 145 LATCH Positions ...... 112 Cybersecurity...... 225 Emergency, In Case Of Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . .114 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 156 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Daytime Running Lights ...... 28 Jacking ...... 163, 192 Children ...... 112 Dealer Service ...... 190 Jump Starting ...... 171 Older Children And Child Restraints .110 Defroster, Rear Window ...... 33 Overheating ...... 174 Seating Positions ...... 111 Defroster, Windshield...... 121 Tow Hooks ...... 178 Child Safety Locks ...... 21 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 29 Towing ...... 176 Cleaning Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 176 Emission Control System Maintenance . .68 Wheels ...... 206 Disturb ...... 269, 280 Engine...... 185 Climate Control ...... 34 Door Ajar ...... 60, 61 Break-In Recommendations ...... 125 Automatic ...... 34 Door Ajar Light ...... 60, 61 Checking Oil Level ...... 187 Manual ...... 34 Drag And Drop Menu ...... 246 Compartment ...... 185 Clock Settings ...... 236 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...... 22 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 219 Clutch ...... 188 Cooling ...... 187 Clutch Fluid ...... 188 E-85 Fuel...... 218 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 120 Compact Spare Tire ...... 205 Electric Brake Control System Fuel Requirements ...... 217 Connector Anti-Lock Brake System ...... 72 Jump Starting ...... 171 UCI ...... 255 Electric Park Brake ...... 125 Oil...... 219 290 Oil Filler Cap ...... 185 Fold-Flat Seats ...... 22 Headlights Oil Selection ...... 219 Forward Collision Warning ...... 81, 82 Automatic ...... 29 Overheating ...... 174 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 175 Automatic High Beam ...... 29 Starting ...... 124 Fuel ...... 217 Delay ...... 30 Enhanced Accident Response Adding ...... 150 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .29 Feature ...... 105, 178 Additives ...... 218 Lights On Reminder ...... 30 Ethanol ...... 218 Ethanol ...... 218 Passing ...... 29 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 120 Gasoline ...... 217 Switch ...... 28 Exhaust System ...... 120 Gauge ...... 62 Time Delay ...... 30 Materials Added ...... 218 Exterior Lighting...... 28 Head Restraints ...... 25 Octane Rating ...... 217, 219 Exterior Lights ...... 28, 122 Head Rests...... 25 Requirements ...... 217 Heated Mirrors...... 28 Specifications ...... 219 Filters High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Tank Capacity ...... 219 Air Conditioning ...... 43 Fuel, Flexible...... 218 Switch ...... 29 Engine Oil ...... 219 Fuses ...... 157 Hill Descent Control ...... 79 Flashers Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 79 Hazard Warning ...... 156 Gasoline (Fuel)...... 217 Hill Start Assist ...... 73 Turn Signal ...... 31, 67 Gauges Hood Prop ...... 49 Turn Signals ...... 67, 122 Fuel ...... 62 Hood Release ...... 49 Flash-To-Pass ...... 29 Gear Ranges ...... 129 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Gear Select Lever Override ...... 174 Ignition ...... 14 Fuel Requirements ...... 218 General Information...... 226 Switch ...... 14 Fluid, Brake ...... 220 Glass Cleaning ...... 214 Instrument Cluster...... 57, 67 Fluid Capacities ...... 219 Descriptions ...... 67 Fluid Leaks ...... 122 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 156 Engine Oil Reset ...... 57 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 219 Instrument Cluster Display Fog Lights ...... 30 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 56 291 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....213 Keys ...... 13 Headlights On Reminder ...... 30 Interior Appearance Care ...... 212 Replacement ...... 14 Headlight Switch ...... 28 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....31 High Beam ...... 29

INDEX Introduction ...... 1 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 31 High Beam/Low Beam Select ...... 29 Inverter Outlet (115V) ...... 52 LaneSense ...... 142 Hill Descent Control Indicator .....79 Inverter, Power ...... 52 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 91 Instrument Cluster ...... 28 Latches ...... 122 Lights On Reminder ...... 30 Jacking Instructions ...... 165 Lead Free Gasoline ...... 217 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .63 Jack Location ...... 164 Leaks, Fluid ...... 122 Park ...... 67 Jack Operation ...... 163, 165, 192 Life Of Tires ...... 203 Passing ...... 29 Jump Starting ...... 171 Liftgate ...... 50, 51 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 61 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...... 33 Security Alarm ...... 62 Key Fob Light Bulbs...... 122 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .63, 83 Arm The Alarm ...... 17 Lights ...... 122 Traction Control ...... 78 Disarm The Alarm ...... 17 AirBag...... 59, 97, 120 Turn Signal ...... 31, 67 Keyless Entry ...... 18 Automatic Headlights ...... 29 Turn Signals ...... 67, 122 Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry ...... 13 Automatic High Beam ...... 29 Warning (Instrument Cluster Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 18 Brake Assist Warning ...... 78 Description) ...... 61, 67 Enter The Trunk ...... 18 Brake Warning ...... 59 Warning Instrument Cluster KeyFob...... 18 Cruise ...... 66, 67 Descriptions ...... 67 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ...... 18 Daytime Running ...... 28 Loading Vehicle Passive Entry ...... 18 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 29 Tires ...... 196 Passive Entry Programming ...... 18 Engine Temperature Warning ...... 61 Locks Remote Control ...... 18 Exterior ...... 122 Child Protection ...... 21 Unlock From The Driver's Side .....18 Fog ...... 30 Low Tire Pressure System ...... 83 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . .18 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 156 Lug Nuts ...... 216 Keyless Entry System ...... 13 Headlights ...... 28 292 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 189 Capacity ...... 219 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...... 95 Maintenance Schedule ...... 180 Checking ...... 187 Preparation For Jacking ...... 165 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Filter ...... 219 Pretensioners Engine) ...... 63, 68 Pressure Warning Light ...... 61 Seat Belts ...... 95 Manual, Service ...... 287 Recommendation ...... 219 Manual Transmission ...... 128, 189 Viscosity ...... 219 Radial Ply Tires ...... 202 Fluid Level Check ...... 189 Oil Pressure Light ...... 61 Radio Shift Speeds ...... 129 Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 67 Presets ...... 237, 241, 247 Master Cylinder (Brakes)...... 188 Operating Precautions ...... 67 Radio Frequency Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ...... 22 Outlet General Information ...... 14, 16 Memory Seat...... 22 Power ...... 51 Radio Operation ...... 235, 238, 245 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 22 Overheating, Engine ...... 174 Radio Screens...... 238, 245 Mirrors Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .287 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 32 Heated ...... 28 Rear Camera ...... 145 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 83 Parking Brake ...... 125 Rear Cross Path ...... 81 Mopar ...... 221 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 140 Rear ParkSense System ...... 140 Mopar Accessories ...... 221 Personalized Main Menu...... 246 Rearview Mirrors ...... 27 Mopar Parts ...... 286 Pets ...... 119 Rear Window Defroster...... 33 Phonebook ...... 268 Rear Wiper/Washer ...... 33 Navigation ...... 255 Phone (Pairing) ...... 264 Recreational Towing...... 152 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 125 Phone (Uconnect) ...... 261 Reminder, Lights On ...... 30 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .196 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 90 Occupant Restraints ...... 89 Power Remote Control Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .217, 219 Inverter ...... 52 Starting System ...... 15 Oil Change Indicator ...... 57 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .51 Remote Keyless Entry ...... 13 Reset ...... 57 Sunroof ...... 47 Arm The Alarm ...... 17 Oil, Engine ...... 219 Windows ...... 43 Disarm The Alarm ...... 17 293 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 18 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Service Manuals ...... 287 Remote Starting System ...... 15 Anchorage ...... 94 Shifting Replacement Keys ...... 14 Child Restraint ...... 108 Manual Transmission ...... 128

INDEX Replacement Tires ...... 203 Energy Management Feature ...... 96 Shift Lever Override...... 174 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 286 Front Seat ...... 90, 91, 93 Shoulder Belts...... 91 Restraint, Head ...... 25 Inspection ...... 120 Signals, Turn...... 31, 67, 122 Restraints, Child ...... 108 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 91 Siri...... 279 Roll Over Warning ...... 2 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....94 Sirius Satellite Radio Rotation, Tires ...... 208 Operating Instructions ...... 93 Traffic & Weather ...... 259 Pregnant Women ...... 95 Sirius Travel Link ...... 260 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 120 Pretensioners ...... 95 SiriusXM Guardian ...... 227 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 122 Rear Seat ...... 91 Account ...... 227 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 286 Reminder ...... 90 App...... 228 Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 120 Safety Information, Tire ...... 192 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 95 In Vehicle Features ...... 229 Safety Tips ...... 119 Untwisting Procedure ...... 94 Maintaining Your Account ...... 229 Schedule, Maintenance ...... 180 Seats ...... 22 Registration ...... 228 Seat Belt Adjustment ...... 22 Remote Features ...... 232 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Head Restraints ...... 25 Renewing Subscriptions ...... 229 Anchorage ...... 94 Rear Folding ...... 22 Send&Go...... 234 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . .96 Tilting ...... 22 Vehicle Finder ...... 234 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...... 93 Security Alarm ...... 17, 62 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 278 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 212 Arm The System ...... 17 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...... 207 Seat Belt Reminder...... 61 Disarm The System ...... 17 Snow Tires ...... 205 Seat Belts ...... 90, 120 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....219 Spare Tires...... 205, 206 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 94 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 14 Spark Plugs ...... 219 Service Assistance ...... 284 Specifications Service Contract ...... 285 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 219 294 Oil...... 219 Tips...... 226 Tire Safety Information ...... 192 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 137 Tire And Loading Information Placard . .196 Tire Service Kit ...... 169 Starting ...... 124 Tire Markings...... 192 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 178 Button ...... 14 Tires...... 122, 200, 205, 209 Towing...... 151 Remote ...... 15 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 203 Disabled Vehicle ...... 176 Starting And Operating ...... 124 Air Pressure ...... 200 Guide ...... 151 Starting Procedures ...... 124 Chains ...... 207 Recreational ...... 152 Steering Changing ...... 163, 192 Weight ...... 151 Tilt Column ...... 26 Compact Spare ...... 205 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)...... 74 Wheel, Heated ...... 27 General Information ...... 200, 205 Trailer Towing ...... 151 Wheel, Tilt ...... 26 High Speed ...... 201 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 151 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 226 Inflation Pressure ...... 201 Trailer Weight ...... 151 Storage, Vehicle ...... 42 Jacking ...... 163, 192 Transfer Case Stuck, Freeing ...... 175 Life Of Tires ...... 203 Fluid ...... 220 Sunroof Load Capacity ...... 196, 197 Transmission Closing ...... 48 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .63 Automatic ...... 131, 189 Opening ...... 48 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .83 Fluid ...... 220 Sun Roof ...... 47 Quality Grading ...... 209 Manual ...... 128 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag.99 Radial ...... 202 Transporting Pets ...... 119 Sway Control, Trailer ...... 74 Replacement ...... 203 Tread Wear Indicators...... 202 System, Remote Starting ...... 15 Rotation ...... 208 Turn Signals...... 31, 67 Safety ...... 192, 200 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 26 Sizes ...... 193 UCI Connector ...... 255 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .42 Snow Tires ...... 205 Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display .....235 Text Messages...... 237, 269 Spare Tires ...... 205, 206 Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Tilt Steering Column ...... 26 Spinning ...... 202 Display ...... 245 Time Delay, Headlight ...... 30 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 202 Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .....238 295 Uconnect Phone...... 261 Voice Recognition System (VR) . .268, 272 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 206 Making A Call ...... 268 Wind Buffeting ...... 45, 47, 48 Uniform Tire Quality Grades...... 209 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 156 Window Fogging...... 43

INDEX Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windows Connector ...... 255 Descriptions) ...... 65 Power ...... 43 Unleaded Gasoline ...... 217 Warning, Roll Over ...... 2 Windshield Defroster ...... 121 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 94 Warranty Information ...... 286 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 190 Washer Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 190 Vehicle Loading ...... 197 Adding Fluid ...... 188 Wipers, Intermittent ...... 31 Vehicle Storage ...... 42 Washing Vehicle ...... 211 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 32 Voice Command ...... 268, 272 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 206 Wrecker Towing ...... 176

296 The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, Get warranty and other information online – you can resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly Driving and Alcohol review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties device or feature that may take their attention off the road. collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are (U.S.) or (Canada). www.mopar.com www.owners.mopar.ca computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. This guide has been prepared to help you get year, make and model of your vehicle. WARNING! If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular source for common questions. However, it is not a perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s substitute for your Owner’s Manual. your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive. For complete operational instructions, maintenance Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road procedures and important safety messages, please WARNING: consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, manuals found on the website on the back cover phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, Not all features shown in this guide may apply do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area to your vehicle. For additional information on and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 2 7/25/18 2:22 PM Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 1 7/25/18 2:22 PM